Kyocera FS 2126MFP User Manual To The 518119df 16ea 4326 A25b 5fbbe373b1ad

User Manual: Kyocera FS-2126MFP to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 526 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

OPERATION GUIDE
FS-C2026MFP/FS-C2126MFP
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of FS-C2026MFP/FS-C2126MFP.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and
take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this machine.
A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand.
Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Quick Installation Guide
Describes the procedures for installation of the machine, frequently-used operations, routine maintenance, and
troubleshooting action.
Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for the installation and use of the machine. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
Safety Guide (FS-C2026MFP/FS-2126MFP)
Describes the machine installation space, cautionary space, and other information. Be sure to read this guide
before using the machine.
CD-ROM (Product Library)
Operation Guide (This Guide)
Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting.
Fax Operation Guide
KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide
Printer Driver Operation Guide
Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide
KMnet Viewer User Guide
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference
i
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect
the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The
symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention
to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The U symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are
indicated inside the symbol.
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the
prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.
The z symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.
Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide
are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
.... [General warning]
.... [Warning of danger of electrical shock]
.... [Warning of high temperature]
.... [Warning of prohibited action]
.... [Disassembly prohibited]
.... [Alert of required action]
.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
.... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground
connection]
Contents
ii
Contents
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Menu Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viii
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Laser Safety (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiv
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxix
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxi
1Part Names
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2 Preparation before Use
Check bundled items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Sleep and Auto Sleep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Switching the Language for Display [Language] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Sending E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Installing Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
3 Basic Operation
Login/Logout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
One-Touch Keys and Program Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Preparation for sending a document to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Confirm Destination Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Specifying Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Scanning using TWAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Checking Remaining Toner and Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
4 Copying Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Original Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
EcoPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Contents
iii
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Print Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Color Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Color Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Background Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
5 Sending Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Duplex Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Original Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Original Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Continuous Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
File Name Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Subject and Body Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Background Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
WSD Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Job Finish Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
FTP Encrypted TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Scanning Image using Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
About Color Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
6 Document Box
Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Removing USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Printing from a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
7 Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Sending the Job Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Device/Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
8 Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
Document Box Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Printing Reports/Sending Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
Adjustment/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101
Contents
iv
Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-133
Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-148
Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-149
Network Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-160
Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-168
Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-173
Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-174
9 Maintenance
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Toner Container Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Replacing the Waste Toner Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
10 Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Responding to Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Responding to an ATTENTION Indicator Flashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
11 Management
User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Checking the Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33
Appendix
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2
Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-7
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-11
Color balance adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-21
Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-22
Color saturation adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-22
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-23
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-28
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
v
Quick Guide
To make copies To print
Simply press the Start key to make
copies. You can also fine tune the
copy settings by changing the
paper size, adjusting the density,
etc.
You can print via a network or print
a PDF file directly from USB
memory.
Be sure to read Legal and Safety Information
before using this machine.
Administrator tasks
It copies. It prints.
Copying with
specific
settings
Printing Documents
Stored in Removable
USB Memory
Print
via a
network
*1: For more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.
Connecting Cables
Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)
Install the printer
driver on your
computer *1
What
you want
to do
Setup
Loading Paper...2-26
Copying Functions
...4-1
Printing
Documents Stored
in USB Memory
...
6-2
Operation
Printing -
Printing from
Applications
...3-22
Placing Originals on
the Platen...2-43
vi
To send documents
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in
USB memory.
Administrator tasks
It sends.
Connecting Cables
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
Place the originals on the platen
Plug the USB
memory
*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address
directly.
Setup
Send
as
E-mail
Send to
Folder
(SMB)
Saving
Documents to
USB Memory
What
you want
to do
Sending
...3-25
*1
Sending Functions
...5-1
Operation
Saving Documents
to USB Memory
(Scan to USB)
...6-5
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding
One-Touch Keys)...8-133
Create a shared folder on the destination
computer. ...3-32
vii
To send a FAX (Only on products with the fax function installed)
As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX Operation
Guide.
Administrator tasks
It faxes.
FAX directly
from a
computer
Send a FAX
Connect the modular cord for the
telephone line to this machine.
Selection of Telephone Line
(Inch version only)
Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)
Install the Network FAX
Driver on your computer *1
*1: For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.
*2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the
FAX by entering the address directly.
Setup
What
you want
to do
Selection of Transmit Terminal Identification
(TTI)...2-3
on the FAX Operation Guide
Place the originals on the platen
FAX Operation
(Basic) ...3-1
on the FAX Operation
Guide
Operation
About Network
FAX ...7-1
on the FAX Operation
Guide
*2
viii
Menu Map
Copy key Function Menu key Paper Selection (page 4-4)
Collate (page 3-20)
Duplex (page 3-16)
Zoom (page 3-13)
Combine (page 4-11)
Original Size (page 4-2)
Orig.Orientation (page 4-8)
Original Image (page 3-11)
Density (page 3-9)
EcoPrint (page 4-10)
Continuous Scan (page 4-14)
File Name Entry (page 4-17)
JobFinish Notice (page 4-15)
Print Override (page 4-18)
Color Selection (page 4-19)
Color Balance (page 4-20)
Sharpness (page 4-22)
Backgrnd Density (page 4-23)
Saturation (page 4-25)
Send key Function Menu key Color Selection (page 5-19)
Original Size (page 5-2)
Original Image (page 5-15)
Scan Resolution (page 5-18)
Sending Size (page 5-4)
Zoom (page 5-6)
Orig.Orientation (page 5-10)
Continuous Scan (page 5-20)
File Format (page 5-12)
File Name Entry (page 5-21)
ix
Subject Entry (page 5-22)
JobFinish Notice (page 5-28)
FAX Resolution (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
FAX Delayed TX (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
FAX Direct TX (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
FAX RX Polling (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Density (page 5-16)
Duplex (page 5-8)
FTP Encrypted TX (page 5-30)
File Separation (page 5-14)
Sharpness (page 5-23)
Backgrnd Density (page 5-24)
Document Box key Sub Address Box (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Polling Box (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Job Box (page 6-8)
USB Memory (page 6-2)
Document Box key Function Menu key
USB printing Collate (page 3-20)
Paper Selection (page 4-4)
Duplex (page 3-16)
File Name Entry (page 4-17)
JobFinish Notice (page 4-15)
Print Override (page 4-18)
Color Selection (page 4-19)
Encrypted PDF
x
JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-3)
XPS FitTo Page (page 6-4)
Function Menu key
Other than USB printing File Name Entry (page 4-17)
JobFinish Notice (page 4-15)
Print Override (page 4-18)
Del. after Print
Function Menu key
Scan to Polling Box Original Size (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Original Image (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
FAX Resolution (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Orig.Orientation (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Continuous Scan (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
File Name Entry (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
JobFinish Notice (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Density (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Duplex (FAX OPERATION
GUIDE)
Function Menu key
Scan to USB Memory Color Selection (page 5-19)
Original Size (page 5-2)
Original Image (page 5-15)
Scan Resolution (page 5-18)
Storing Size
Zoom (page 5-6)
Orig.Orientation (page 5-10)
Continuous Scan (page 5-20)
File Format (page 5-12)
File Name Entry (page 5-21)
xi
JobFinish Notice (page 5-28)
Density (page 5-16)
Duplex (page 5-8)
Sharpness (page 5-23)
Backgrnd Density (page 5-24)
Status/Job Cancel key Print Job Status (page 7-2)
Send Job Status (page 7-2)
Store Job Status (page 7-2)
Scheduled Job (page 7-8)
Print Job Log (page 7-8)
Send Job Log (page 7-8)
Store Job Log (page 7-8)
Scanner (page 7-19)
Printer (page 7-19)
FAX (page 7-20)
Toner Status (page 3-51)
Paper Status (page 3-51)
USB Memory (page 7-20)
USB Keyboard (page 7-21)
System Menu/Counter
key Report Report Print Menu Map (page 8-95)
Status Page (page 8-95)
Font List (page 8-96)
Admin Rpt
Set. Outgoing
FAX Rpt (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
Incoming
FAX Rpt (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
Result Rpt
Set. Send Result E-mail/Folder (page 8-99)
xii
FAX (page 8-99)
CancelBefore
Send (page 8-99)
FAX RX
Result (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
JobFinish
Notice Do Not
Attach
Attach
SendImage
Job Log
History Auto Sending (page 7-13)
Send History (page 7-13)
Destination (page 7-13)
Subject (page 7-13)
SSFC Log
Subject
Counter Printed
Pages by Function (page 11-33)
by Paper
Size Full Color (page 11-33)
Black &
White (page 11-33)
Scanned
Pages (page 11-33)
System Network
Setting TCP/IP
Settings TCP/IP (page 8-149)
IPv4 Setting (page 8-150)
IPv6 Setting (page 8-150)
Protocol
Detail (page 8-157)
NetWare (page 8-151)
AppleTalk (page 8-153)
WSD-SCAN (page 8-154)
WSD-PRINT (page 8-155)
IPSec (page 8-166)
Secure
Protocol SSL (page 8-160)
xiii
IPP Security (page 8-161)
HTTP
Security (page 8-162)
LDAP
Security (page 8-164)
Host Name
LAN Interface (page 8-149)
I/F Block Set. USB Host (page 8-168)
USB Device (page 8-169)
Option I/F 1 (page 8-171)
Option I/F 2 (page 8-171)
Security
Level (page 8-173)
Restart (page 8-148)
Op Functions (page 8-174)
User/Job
Account User Login
Set. User Login (page 11-3)
Local User
List (page 11-3)
IC Card
Settings Key Login
Password
Login
Group Auth. (page 11-10)
NW User
Property (page 11-11)
Job
Account.Set. Job
Accounting (page 11-13)
Account.
Report (page 11-31)
Total
Accounting Printed
Pages (page 11-27)
Scanned
Pages (page 11-27)
FAX TX
Pages (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
xiv
FAX TX Time (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
Counter
Reset (page 11-27)
Each Job
Account (page 11-28)
Account. List (page 11-16)
Default
Setting Apply Limit (page 11-23)
Copy/Print
Count (page 11-19)
Counter Limit (page 11-25)
Unknown ID
Job (page 11-12)
Common
Settings Language (page 8-3)
Default
Screen (page 8-5)
Sound Buzzer Key
Confirmation (page 8-6)
Job Finish (page 8-6)
Ready (page 8-6)
Warning (page 8-6)
Keyboard
Confirm (page 8-6)
FAX Speaker (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
FAX Monitor (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
Display
Bright. (page 8-7)
Orig./Paper
Set. Custom
Orig.Size (page 8-8)
Def. Orig.
Size (page 8-10)
Custom
PaperSize (page 8-11)
xv
Custom
PaperSize Cassette 1
Size (page 8-13)
Cassette 1
Type (page 8-13)
Cassette 2
Set. Cassette 2
Size (page 8-13)
Cassette 2
Type (page 8-13)
Cassette 3
Set. Cassette 3
Size (page 8-13)
Cassette 3
Type (page 8-13)
MP Tray Set. MP Tray Size (page 8-15)
MP Tray
Type (page 8-15)
Media Type
Set. (page 8-17)
Media for
Auto Full Color (page 8-22)
Black &
White (page 8-22)
Def.
PaperSource (page 8-21)
SpcialPaper
Act. (page 8-23)
Preset Limit (page 8-25)
Measurement
(page 8-26)
Error
Handling DuplexPaper
Error (page 8-27)
PaperMismat
chErr (page 8-27)
Date Setting Date/Time (page 8-117)
Date Format (page 8-119)
Time Zone (page 8-120)
Summer
Time (page 8-121)
Timer Setting Err. Clear
Timer (page 8-123)
xvi
Sleep Timer (page 8-125)
Sleep Level Quick
Recovery (page 8-126)
Energy Saver (page 8-126)
PanelReset
Timer (page 8-129)
Auto Err.
Clear (page 8-122)
Auto Panel
Reset (page 8-128)
Unusable
Time (page 8-130)
Function
Default Color
Selection (page 8-33)
Scan
Resolution (page 8-32)
FAX
Resolution (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
Original
Image (page 8-31)
Density (page 8-37)
Zoom (page 8-38)
Collate (page 8-42)
Orig.Orientati
on (page 8-29)
EcoPrint (page 8-43)
File Name
Entry (page 8-39)
Subject/Body (page 8-40)
Continuous
Scan (page 8-30)
File Format (page 8-36)
File
Separation (page 8-46)
JPEG/TIFF
Print (page 8-44)
xvii
XPS FitTo
Page (page 8-45)
Detail Setting 2 in 1 Layout (page 8-47)
4 in 1 Layout (page 8-48)
Border Line (page 8-50)
Orig. Binding (page 8-51)
Finish.
Binding (page 8-53)
Image
Quality (page 8-54)
Color TIFF
Comp. (page 8-55)
PDF/A (page 8-56)
Login
Operation (page 8-58)
Optional
Memory Normal (page 8-59)
Printer
Priority (page 8-59)
Copy Priority (page 8-59)
RAM Disk
Setting (page 8-60)
Copy Photo
Processing (page 8-62)
Paper
Selection (page 8-63)
AutoPaperSe
lect. (page 8-64)
Auto %
Priority (page 8-65)
DP Read
Action (page 8-66)
Select Key
Set. Left (page 8-68)
Right (page 8-68)
Printer Emulation
Set. PCL6 (page 8-79)
KPDL (page 8-80)
xviii
KPDL(Auto) (page 8-81)
Color Setting (page 8-82)
EcoPrint (page 8-82)
Override A4/
LTR (page 8-83)
Duplex (page 8-84)
Copies (page 8-85)
Orientation (page 8-87)
Gloss Mode (page 8-88)
Wide A4 (page 8-89)
FormFeed
TimeOut (page 8-89)
LF Action (page 8-90)
CR Action (page 8-91)
Print Offset (page 8-92)
Paper Feed
Mode (page 8-93)
Send Select Key
Set. Left (page 8-70)
Right (page 8-70)
Destination
Check Check
beforeSend (page 8-72)
Check New
Dest. (page 8-72)
FAX (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
Document
Box Sub Address
Box (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
Job Box (page 8-76)
Polling Box (FAX
OPERATION
GUIDE)
Select Key
Set. Print Left (page 8-74)
Right (page 8-74)
xix
Store Left (page 8-74)
Right (page 8-74)
Edit
Destination Address
Book (page 8-143)
Print List (page 8-143)
Adjust/Maint. Copy Denst.
Adj. Auto (page 8-101)
Manual (page 8-101)
Send/Box
Density Auto (page 8-102)
Manual (page 8-102)
AutoColor
Correct (page 8-103)
Color
Calibration (page 8-104)
Color Regist. Normal Print Chart (page 8-105)
Adjust
Magenta (page 8-105)
Adjust Cyan (page 8-105)
Adjust Yellow (page 8-105)
Detail Print Chart (page 8-107)
Adjust
Magenta (page 8-107)
Adjust Cyan (page 8-107)
Adjust Yellow (page 8-107)
Correct. Bk
Line (page 8-111)
Service
Setting Service
Status
Network
Status
Test Page
Developer
Setting
Developer
Refresh
xx
LaserScanner
Cln (page 8-112)
Drum
Refresh (page 8-113)
Altitude Adj. (page 8-114)
MC (page 8-115)
FAX Country
Code
FAX Call Set.
Remote
Diag.Set.
Remote Diag.
ID
xxi
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
• Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)
• Humidity: 15 to 80 %
However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. Avoid the following locations when
selecting a site for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be
damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If,
however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an
extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment
for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
xxii
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.
Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and
ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin.
• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount
of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.
xxiii
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The
collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of
temperature and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi
Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
If using the products with the fax function installed the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is
disabled. Do not turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep
mode.
xxiv
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this
machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the
product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825-1:2007.
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.
The label shown below is attached on the rear side of the machine.
xxv
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
1. Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance
standards established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This
indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical
system, enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser
beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological
Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in
the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown
below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the
United States. On this machine, the label is on the rear.
FS-C2126MFPFS-C2026MFP
xxvi
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is
the label located on the cover of the optical unit.
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
xxvii
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (USA)
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional
switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Les
interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors
tension.
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)
This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
* The above warning is valid only in the United States of America.
Radio Tag Technology
In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to
authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.
MERCURY WARNING
THE LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF
ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.
xxviii
Warranty (USA)
FS-C2026MFP/FS-C2126MFP
MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY
Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as "Kyocera") warrant
the Customer's new Multifunctional Product (referred to as "MFP"), and the new accessories
installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any defects in material and workmanship for
a period of one (1) year, or 200,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In
the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera's
only obligation and the Customer's exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts.
Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor.
This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new
Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized
Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide
service, write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera
Dealer in your area or check Kyocera's website at www.kyoceramita.com/us.
This warranty does not cover MFP's or accessories, which: (a) have become damaged due to
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress, (b)
have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies, (c) have been
installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer, or
(d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.
This warranty does not cover Maintenance Kits or the components of Maintenance Kits, which
consist of the drum unit, the developing unit, the transfer belt, and the fixing unit which have a
separate warranty.
This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is
authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY
OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS
WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF, OR
INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.
xxix
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
• It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
• Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low.
It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/
scanned.
Paper money
Bank note
Securities
Stamp
Passport
Certificate
• Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
xxx
xxxi
Legal and Safety Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information
on the following topics.
• Legal Information........................................................ xxxii
• Regarding Trade Names ........................................... xxxiii
• Energy Saving Control Function............................... xxxvii
• Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function............................ xxxvii
• Paper Recycling ....................................................... xxxvii
• Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ................ xxxvii
• About this Operation Guide ......................................xxxviii
• Conventions in This Guide ........................................ xxxix
xxxii
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita
Corporation is prohibited.
xxxiii
Regarding Trade Names
• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.
• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• Windows Me, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7 are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
• TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
• TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype
Imaging Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered
trademarks of International Type-face Corporation.
• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• ThinPrint is a trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.
The designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
xxxiv
GPL
Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html). Please access
“http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl” for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available.
Open SSLeay License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/
/www.openssl.org/)”
4The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
xxxv
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to.
The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided
with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]
xxxvi
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a
special format as well as the UFST Software.
2You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles
and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary
business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype
Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three
printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multi-
user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all
rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a
License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other
proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable
procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup
copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the
original.
5This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated.
This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License
and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this
License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the
Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.
6You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the
Software.
7Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in
accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in
material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs,
errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a
particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and
Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or
consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and
Typefaces.
9Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior
written consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms
and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this
Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized
representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and
conditions of this Agreement.
xxxvii
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Sleep Mode where copier, printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state
but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set
amount of time.
Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 1 minute has passed since the device was last used.
Automatic authentication does not take place in sleep mode or energy saver mode. To continue the installation,
press the Power key to wake the machine from sleep mode or energy saver mode.
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function
This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto
a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information
see Duplex Copying on page 3-16.
Paper Recycling
This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service
representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that
this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
xxxviii
About this Operation Guide
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter 1 - Part Names
Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys.
Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use
Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first
use.
Chapter 3 - Basic Operation
Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.
Chapter 4 - Copying Functions
Describes the functions you can use when copying.
Chapter 5 - Sending Functions
Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.
Chapter 6 - Document Box
Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.
Chapter 7 - Status / Job Cancel
Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print.
Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel a transmission
Chapter 8 - Default Setting (System Menu)
Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.
Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Describes cleaning and toner or waste toner box replacement.
Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting
Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems.
Chapter 11 - Management
Explains user login administration and job accounting.
Appendix
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.
Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.
Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.
xxxix
Conventions in This Guide
The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.
Convention Description Example
Bold Indicates the operation panel
keys or a computer screen. Press the Start key.
[Regular] Indicates a selection item on the
Message Display. Select [System].
Italic Indicates a message displayed
on the Message Display. Ready to copy is displayed.
Used to emphasize a key word,
phrase or references to
additional information.
For details on Network FAX, refer to the
FAX Operation Guide.
Note Indicates supplemental
information or operations for
reference. NOTE:
Important Indicates items that are required
or prohibited so as to avoid
problems. IMPORTANT:
Caution Indicates what must be
observed to prevent injury or
machine breakdown and how to
deal with it.
CAUTION:
Underline A link function allows you to
jump to a related page. Position
the pointer over the underlined
text until the pointer changes to
a hand with appointing finger
( ). Then click the text. (In the
Contents, Index and Menu Map,
the linked areas are not
underlined.)
Refer to Contents.
xl
1-1
1Part Names
This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys.
• Operation Panel............................................................1-2
• Machine........................................................................1-4
Part Names
1-2
Operation Panel
Displays the System Menu/Counter menu screen,
where you can check the system settings and
counters.
Displays the Document Box screen, where you
can operate the document box and USB
memory.
Displays the Status screen, where you can
check the status, print a status report, and
pause or cancel the job in process.
Displays the Copy
screen, where you can
make settings required
for copying.
Displays the FAX screen,
where you can send a
FAX.*
Displays the Send screen, where
you can send an e-mail, folder
(SMB/FTP) or FAX*.
Used to register, call and delete
destinations to the one-touch key
numbers (1 to 22).
Shifts to switch the one-touch
key numbers (1 to 11 and 12 to
22).
Indicator is lit while shifted (12
to 22).
Displays the Address Book screen, where you can add, edit and delete destinations.
Calls the previous destination. Also used to enter a pause when entering a
FAX number.*
Displays the Add Destination screen, where you can add
destinations.
Switches between on-hook and off-hook when manually
sending a FAX.*
Message Display. Check what is
shown here while operating the
machine.
Selects the menu displayed
at the lower right in the
Message Display.
* Only on products with the fax function installed.
Selects the menu
displayed at the lower left
in the Message Display.
Blinks while print data
is being received or
data is transmitted.
Blinks while the
machine is accessing
the memory.
Selects auto color mode.
Selects full color mode.
Selects black and white mode.
Part Names
1-3
1
Used to select a menu item, move the cursor when
entering characters, change a value, etc.
Selects the chosen item or finalizes the entered
value.
Displays the function menu for copy,
print, transmission and document box.
Numeric keys. Enter
numbers and symbols.
Returns the Message Display to the
previous screen.
Lights or blinks when an error occurs.
Clears entered numbers and characters.
Resets settings and displays the basic screen.
Puts the machine to sleep or wakes it up.
Lit when the machine's
main power is on.
Ends operation
(logs out) on the
Administration screen.
Used to register or recall programs.
Cancels the printing job in progress.
Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for
setting operations.
Part Names
1-4
Machine
1Operation Panel
2Top Cover (Top Tray)
3Paper Stopper
4MP (Multi-Purpose) Tray
5Paper Cassette
6USB Memory Slot
7Main Power Switch
8Black Toner Container (K)
9Magenta Toner Container (M)
10 Cyan Toner Container (C)
11 Yellow Toner Container (Y)
12 Waste Toner Cover
13 Waste Toner Box
6
2
3
4
5
1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Part Names
1-5
1
14 Paper Transfer Unit
15 Paper Ramp
16 Duplex Unit
17 LINE connector*
18 TEL connector*
19 Network Interface Connector
20 Network Indicators
21 Network Interface Connector
* Only on products with the fax function installed
15
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
24
Part Names
1-6
22 USB Memory Slot
23 Right Cover
24 Power Cord Connector
25 Rear Cover
26 Rear Cover Lever
27 Original Width Guides
28 Document Processor Cover
29 Opening Handle*
30 Original Table
31 Original Stopper
32 Original Eject Table
33 Top Cover Lever*
34 Handles for moving
35 Platen
* To prevent toppling, the top tray and document processor cannot be opened at the same time.
30
31
32
33
27
28
29
34
35
2-1
2 Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well
as the procedures for loading papers and originals.
• Check bundled items.................................................... 2-2
•
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables
...... 2-3
• Connecting Cables ....................................................... 2-5
• Power On/Off................................................................ 2-7
• Sleep and Auto Sleep...................................................2-9
• Switching the Language for Display [Language] ........ 2-10
• Setting Date and Time................................................ 2-11
• Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection).................... 2-14
• Installing Software ......................................................2-22
• COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)................ 2-23
• Sending E-mail ........................................................... 2-24
• Loading Paper ............................................................ 2-26
• Loading Originals........................................................2-43
• Installing Printer Driver ...............................................2-46
Preparation before Use
2-2
Check bundled items
Check that the following items have been bundled.
• Quick Installation Guide
• Safety Guide
• Safety Guide (FS-C2026MFP/FS-C2126MFP)
• CD-ROM (Product Library)
• CD-ROM (TWAIN compatible application)
Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM
The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary.
Documents
Operation Guide (This Guide)
Fax Operation Guide
KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide
Printer Driver User Guide
Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide
KMnet Viewer User Guide
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference
Preparation before Use
2-3
2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables
Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.
Connection Example
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.
Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network
cable (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)
FAX
Send FTP
Sends the scanned
image as a data file on
the FTP.
Send E-mail
Sends the image data
of scanned originals to
the desired recipient
as a file attached to an
E-mail message.
Send SMB
Saves the scanned
image as a data file on
your PC.
MFP
FAX
Administrator’s
PC
COMMAND CENTER
Network settings, Scanner
default settings, User and
destination registration
Network FAX
TWAIN Scanning
WIA Scanning
TWAIN and WIA are
standardized interface
for communication
between software
applications and image
acquisition devices.
USB
Network
Printing
Network
Network
Network
Network
USB
* Only on products with the fax function installed
Network
Network
Preparation before Use
2-4
Preparing Necessary Cables
The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables
according to the interface you use.
Available Standard Interfaces
Function Interface Necessary Cable
Printer/Scanner
/TWAIN
Scanning/WIA
Scanning/
Network FAX*
* Network FAX and FAX functions available only on products with the
fax function installed. For details on Network FAX, refer to the FAX
Operation Guide.
Network interface LAN (10Base-T or
100Base-TX, Shielded)
Printer/WIA
Scanning USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable
(Hi-Speed USB compliant,
Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
Preparation before Use
2-5
2
Connecting Cables
Follow the steps below to connect cables to the machine.
1If the machine power is on, press the power key on
the operation panel and make sure that the
message displayed and memory light are off.
Then, press the main power switch to turn off the
power.
2Connect the machine to the PC or your network
device. When using the network interface, remove
the cap.
3Remove the Power Cord Connector Cover.
On
Off
Preparation before Use
2-6
4Connect one end of the supplied power cable to
the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes
with the machine.
5Replace the Power Cord Connector Cover.
6Turn the main power switch on. The machine
begins to warm up.
7When connecting the network cable, configure the
network. For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN
Cable Connection) on page 2-14.
On
Off
Preparation before Use
2-7
2
Power On/Off
Power On
When the main power indicator is lit...
Press the Power key.
When the main power indicator is off...
Turn the main power switch on.
IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch,
do not turn on the main power switch again
immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn
on the main power switch.
Power Off
Before turning off the main power switch, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the
memory indicator is off before turning off the main power switch.
On
Off
Make sure that
the indicator is off.
Off
On
Preparation before Use
2-8
In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time
CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the
main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation),
remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If using the products equipped with the
fax function, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and
reception.
IMPORTANT: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
Preparation before Use
2-9
2
Sleep and Auto Sleep
Sleep
To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Message Display
and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to
save a maximum amount of power except the Main
Power indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is
performed while the Message Display remains unlit.
If you are using the products equipped with the fax
function, received fax data is printed out while the
operation panel also remains unlit.
To resume, press the Power key. The machine will be
ready to operate in about 20 seconds.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as
ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into
Sleep Mode if left idle for 1 minute.
Energy Saver (products that is not equipped with the fax function)
This mode reduces power consumption even more
than normal sleep mode, and allows sleep mode to be
set separately for each function. Settings can be
specified to prevent access from a computer, such as
printing from a computer or accessing COMMAND
CENTER, while the machine is asleep.
To use the machine, press the Power key. The time
required for the machine to wake up from power save
mode and resume normal operation will be longer than
for sleep mode.
NOTE: Energy Saver mode settings, see Sleep
Level on page 8-126.
Preparation before Use
2-10
Switching the Language for Display [Language]
Select the language displayed on the Message Display.
Use the procedure below to select the language.
1Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
NOTE: The default settings of the Login User Name
and Login Password are both "2600".
If user management is selected in [Network Setting],
press [Menu] (the Left Select key) to authenticate.
Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for
details on entering characters.
2In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
3Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Language].
5Press the OK key. Language appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the desired
language and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Common Settings menu.
Login User Name:
L
b
********************
Login Password:
[ Menu ] [ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
5
User Property
*********************
7
Copy
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Language:
a
b
*********************
2
Deutsch
3
Français
1
*English
Preparation before Use
2-11
2
Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the
header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the
machine is used.
NOTE: Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.
1Turn on the main power switch.
2Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
3In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
4Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting].
On
Off
Login User Name:
L
b
********************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
5
User Property
*********************
7
Copy
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Preparation before Use
2-12
6A login screen will appear. Then, enter the Login
User Name and Login Password to log in.
7Press [Login] (the Right Select key). The Date
Setting menu appears.
8Press the U or V key to select [Time Zone].
9Press the OK key. Time Zone appears.
10 Press the U or V key to select your region and
then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Date Setting menu.
11
Press the U or V key to select [Summer Time].
12
Press the OK key. Summer Time appears.
13
Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and
then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Date Setting menu.
Login User Name:
L
b
********************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Date Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Date Format
3
Time Zone
[ Exit ]
1
Date/Time
Time Zone
:
a
b
*********************
2
-11:00 Midway
3
-10:00 Hawaii
1
-12:00 Internati
Date Setting:
a
b
2
Date Format
3
Time Zone
*********************
[ Exit ]
4
Summer Time
Summer Time:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Preparation before Use
2-13
2
14
Press the U or V key to select [Date/Time].
15
Press the OK key. Date/Time appears.
16
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position,
press the U or V key to enter year, month and day,
and then press the OK key.
17
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position,
press the U or V key to enter hours, minutes and
seconds, and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Date Setting menu.
18
Press the U or V key to select [Date Format].
19
Press the OK key. Date Format appears.
20
Press the U or V key to select the desired display
format and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Date Setting menu.
Date Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Date Format
3
Time Zone
[ Exit ]
1
Date/Time
Date/Time:
a
b
Year
Month Day
2010
01
01
(Time Zone:Tokyo )
Date/Time:
a
b
Hour
Min. Second
11:
45:
50
(Time Zone:Tokyo )
Date Setting:
a
b
1
Date/Time
*********************
3
Time Zone
[ Exit ]
2
Date Format
Date Format:
a
b
*********************
2
Day/Month/Year
3
Year/Month/Day
1
*Month/Day/Year
Preparation before Use
2-14
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP
(IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows,
Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms.
This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup procedures. For other network settings, refer to Network
Setup on page 8-149.
•TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (when an IP address is automatically assigned) ...2-16
•TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) ...2-16
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (when an IP address is automatically assigned)
If an IP address will be automatically assigned, configure the settings below.
NOTE: The [DHCP] and [Auto-IP] settings are enabled by default. Specify the settings below when Network
Setup on page 8-149 have been changed from their default state.
Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.
1Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
2In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and then press the OK key.
IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have
logged in using a Login User Name with administrator
privileges.
The default settings of the Login User Name and Login
Password are both "2600".
If you have logged in using a Login User Name without
administrator privileges, the screen will display
Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.
Login User Name:
L
b
********************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Administrator only.
Preparation before Use
2-15
2
3In the System menu, press the U or V key to
select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
6Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP].
8Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the TCP/IP Settings menu.
10
Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting].
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
NetWare
3
AppleTalk
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP Settings
TCP/IP Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
IPv4 Setting
3
IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP
TCP/IP:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
TCP/IP Settings:
a
b
1
TCP/IP
*********************
3
IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]
2
IPv4 Setting
Preparation before Use
2-16
11
Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.
12
Press the U or V key to select [DHCP].
13
Press the OK key. DHCP appears.
14
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the IPv4 Setting menu.
15
Press the U or V key to select [Auto-IP].
16
Press the OK key. Auto-IP appears.
17
Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the IPv4 Setting menu.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)
Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off, Auto-IP: On".
NOTE: Before setting an IP address, ask your network administrator if your network environment requires
input of an IP address. If input is necessary, ask your network administrator to obtain an IP address for you.
IPv4 Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Bonjour
3
Auto-IP
[ Exit ]
1
DHCP
DHCP:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
IPv4 Setting:
a
b
1
DHCP
2
Bonjour
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
Auto-IP
Auto-IP:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
Preparation before Use
2-17
2
Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.
1Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
2In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and then press the OK key.
IMPORTANT: To make the settings, you must have
logged in using a Login User Name with administrator
privileges.
The default settings of the Login User Name and Login
Password are both "2600".
If you have logged in using a Login User Name without
administrator privileges, the screen will display
Administrator only. and return to the standby screen.
3In the System menu, press the U or V key to
select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
Login User Name:
L
b
********************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Administrator only.
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
NetWare
3
AppleTalk
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP Settings
Preparation before Use
2-18
6Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP].
8Press the OK key. TCP/IP appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the TCP/IP Settings menu.
10
Press the U or V key to select [IPv4 Setting].
11
Press the OK key. The IPv4 Setting menu appears.
12
Press the U or V key to select [DHCP].
13
Press the OK key. DHCP appears.
14
Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press
the OK key.
TCP/IP Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
IPv4 Setting
3
IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP
TCP/IP:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
TCP/IP Settings:
a
b
1
TCP/IP
*********************
3
IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]
2
IPv4 Setting
IPv4 Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Bonjour
3
Auto-IP
[ Exit ]
1
DHCP
DHCP:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
Preparation before Use
2-19
2
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the IPv4 Setting menu.
15
Press the U or V key to select [Bonjour].
16
Press the OK key. Bonjour appears.
17
Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the IPv4 Setting menu.
18
Press the U or V key to select [Auto-IP].
19
Press the OK key. Auto-IP appears.
20
Press the U or V key to select [Off] and then press
the OK key.
21
Press the U or V key to select [IP Address].
IPv4 Setting:
a
b
1
DHCP
*********************
3
Auto-IP
[ Exit ]
2
Bonjour
Bonjour:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
IPv4 Setting:
a
b
1
DHCP
2
Bonjour
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
Auto-IP
Auto-IP:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
IPv4 Setting:
a
b
2
Bonjour
3
Auto-IP
*********************
[ Exit ]
4
IP Address
Preparation before Use
2-20
22
Press the OK key. IP Address appears.
23
Use the arrow keys to enter the IP address.
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position
horizontally.
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter
the IP Address. Each 3 digits can be set between
000 and 255.
IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-14) is
[On], the current IP address is displayed and cannot be
changed.
When setting an IP address, set the DHCP Setting
(page 2-14) to Off.
24
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.
25 Press the U or V key to select [Subnet Mask].
26 Press the OK key. Subnet Mask appears.
27
Use the arrow keys to enter the Subnet Mask.
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position
horizontally.
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter
the Subnet Mask. Each 3 digits can be set between
000 and 255.
IP Address:
a
b
123.145.167.
189
IP Address:
b
123.145.167.189
IPv4 Setting:
a
b
3
IP Address
*********************
5
Default Gateway
[ Exit ]
4
Subnet Mask
Subnet Mask:
a
b
123.145.167.
189
Preparation before Use
2-21
2
IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-14) is
[On], the current Subnet Mask is displayed and cannot
be changed.
When setting an Subnet Mask, set the DHCP Setting
(page 2-14) to Off.
28
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.
29 Press the U or V key to select [Default Gateway].
30
Press the OK key. Default Gateway appears.
31
Use the arrow keys to enter the Default Gateway.
Press the Y or Z key to move the cursor position
horizontally.
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter
the Default Gateway. Each 3 digits can be set
between 000 and 255.
IMPORTANT: When the DHCP Setting (page 2-14) is
[On], the current Default Gateway is displayed and
cannot be changed.
When setting an Default Gateway, set the DHCP
Setting (page 2-14) to Off.
32
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the IPv4 Setting menu.
IPv4 Setting:
a
b
3
IP Address
4
Subnet Mask
*********************
[ Exit ]
5
Default Gateway
Default Gateway:
a
b
123.145.167.
189
Preparation before Use
2-22
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD-ROM (Product Library) if you want
to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your
PC.
NOTE: Installation on Windows XP, Windows 2000, Server 2003, Windows Vista and Windows 7 must be
done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Mode. Wake the device from Sleep Mode before
continuing. See Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-9.
FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed.
Preparation before Use
2-23
2
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)
COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and
changing the settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.
NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer
to the FAX Operation Guide.
FAX functions available only on products with the fax function installed.
The procedure for accessing COMMAND CENTER is explained below.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address.
E.g.) http://192.168.48.21/
The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their
current status.
3Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each category must be
set separately.
If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter the correct password to access pages other
than the startup page. The default setting is admin00. The password can be changed.
For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
Preparation before Use
2-24
Sending E-mail
Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following:
• The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server
A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended.
• SMTP Settings
Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.
• If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.
• Sender address
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
1Click Advanced -> SMTP -> General.
Preparation before Use
2-25
2
2Enter the correct settings in each field.
The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below.
3Click Submit.
Item Description
SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be
enabled.
SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.
SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of the
SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the name, a DNS
server address must also be configured. The DNS server address may be
entered on the TCP/IP General tab.
SMTP Server Timeout Enter the default time out for the server in seconds.
Authentication
Protocol Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP
as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000.
Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a
different account.
Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate, the Login User Name set here will be
used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the Login User Name is
64 characters.
Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be used for
authentication. The maximum length of the Login Password is 64 characters.
POP before SMTP
Timeout Enter the timeout (in seconds) if you chose POP before SMTP as the
Authentication Protocol.
Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.
E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the value is
0, the limitation for E-mail size is disabled.
Sender Address Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the
machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is
128 characters.
Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of
the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The
maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.
Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length
of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail addresses.
Preparation before Use
2-26
Loading Paper
Paper can be loaded standardly in the cassette and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as
an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).
Before Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets
to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following
steps.
1Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the
middle.
2Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while
keeping the entire stack swelled.
3Raise the right and left hands alternately to create
a gap and feed air between the papers.
4Finally, align the papers on a level, flat table.
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before
loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a
jam.
CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper
already used for copying), do not use paper that is
stapled or clipped together. This may damage the
machine or cause poor image quality.
NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled,
turn the stack in the cassette upside down.
Avoid exposing opened paper to high
temperatures and high humidity as dampness can
be a cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper
after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes
back in the paper storage bag.
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged
period, protect all paper from humidity by removing
it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper
storage bag.
NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead,
paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or
company name, refer to Paper on Appendix-11.
Preparation before Use
2-27
2
Loading Paper in the Cassettes
The standard cassette will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
The standard cassette holds up to 250 sheets of Legal or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2).
The following paper sizes are supported: A4, A5, A6, B5, Legal, Letter, Other (Folio, Oficio II, Executive,
Statement, 16K and Envelope C5)
IMPORTANT:
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such papers may
cause paper jams or other faults.)
• When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the
media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-35)
The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g/m2.
• Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper
that is heavier than 163 g/m2.
1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
IMPORTANT: When pulling the cassette out of the
machine, ensure it is supported and does not fall out.
2Turn the Paper Size Dial until the paper size you
are using is visible. The paper size set here is
recognized by the machine.
IMPORTANT: To use a paper size that does not
appear on the size dial, set the size dial to "Other". The
paper size must also be set from the operation panel.
For details, see Specifying Paper Size and Media on
page 2-35.
3Adjust the position of the paper width guides
located on the left and right sides of the cassette.
Preparation before Use
2-28
NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
4Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size
required.
5Load the paper in the cassette. Ensure the side to
be printed is facing up and the paper is not folded,
curled, or damaged.
IMPORTANT: Do not load paper above the triangle
mark located on the width guide.
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration below).
• When loading the paper, keep the side that was
closest the package seal facing up.
• The paper length and width guides must be
adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper
without adjusting these guides may cause skewed
feeding and paper jams.
• Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest
securely against the paper. If there is a gap,
readjust the guides to fit the paper.
Preparation before Use
2-29
2
6Insert the paper cassette into the slot in the
machine. Push it straight in as far as it will go.
There is a paper gauge on the right side of the front
of the paper cassette to indicate the remaining
paper supply. When paper is exhausted, the
pointer will go down to the level of (empty).
NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged
period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it
from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage
bag.
7Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded
in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size
and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-35.)
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
The multi purpose tray will hold up to 50 sheets of Legal or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2).
The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A4 to A6 and Hagaki and from Legal to Statement-R, and 16K.
Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always
specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on
page 2-40.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick.
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.
• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets
• Hagaki: 15 sheets
• OHP film: 1 sheet
• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
(Commercial #6 3/4), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 5 sheets
NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and
Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-40.
When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-40.
Preparation before Use
2-30
1Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops.
2When using legal size paper, pull out the sub tray.
3Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP
tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP
tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper
sizes, slide the paper guides to the corresponding
mark.
4Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as
far as it will go.
IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the
package seal facing up.
Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
Straighten the top edge if it is curled.
When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check
that there is no paper left over in the tray from a
previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a
small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray
and you want to add more, first remove the left-over
paper from the tray and include it with the new paper
before loading the paper back into the tray.
Preparation before Use
2-31
2
Loading Envelopes or Hagaki
5 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.
Acceptable envelope and Hagaki sizes are as follows.
c
°
Acceptable Envelope Size
Hagaki 148×100 (mm)
Oufuku Hagaki 148×200 (mm)
Youkei 2 162×114 (mm)
Youkei 4 235×105 (mm)
Monarch 3 7/8"×7 1/2"
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) 4 1/8"×9 1/2"
Envelope DL 110×220 (mm)
Envelope C5 162×229 (mm)
Executive 7 1/4"×10 1/2"
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) 3 7/8"×8 7/8"
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) 3 5/8"×6 1/2"
ISO B5 176×250 (mm)
Preparation before Use
2-32
1Pull the MP tray towards you until it stops.
2When using legal size paper, pull out the sub tray.
3Adjust the position of the paper guides on the MP
tray. Standard paper sizes are marked on the MP
tray or Manual Feed tray. For standard paper
sizes, slide the paper guides to the corresponding
mark.
4Align the paper with the paper guides and insert as
far as it will go.
5For landscape form envelopes, close the flap.
Insert the envelope all the way along the width
guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the
edge with the flap left.
For portrait form envelopes, open the flap. Insert
the envelope all the way along the width guides,
keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with
the flap facing the front side.
Preparation before Use
2-33
2
IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-40.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray
Load envelope with the print side facing up.
Close the flap.
Landscape
form
envelopes
Portrait
form
envelopes
Cardstock
(Hagaki)
Return postcard
(Oufuku Hagaki)
NOTE: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki).
Open the flap.
Preparation before Use
2-34
Paper stopper
To use the sheet ejection stopper, open as shown below. (Example: Legal)
Preparation before Use
2-35
2
Specifying Paper Size and Media
The default paper size setting for cassette, for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes
2 and 3) is [Letter], and the default media type setting is [Plain].
To set the paper used in the cassette when the paper is a frequently used paper, set the paper size using the size
dial as described in Loading Paper in the Cassettes on page 2-27, and then set the paper type as described in
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-35. If the paper does not appear on the size
dial, set the size dial to "Other" as described in Loading Paper in the Cassettes on page 2-27, and then set the
paper size and paper type as described in Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-35
To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-40.)
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassette or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3), specify the paper
size. Also, you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting.
Cassettes
Paper feeder
* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to Original/Paper Settings on page
8-8.
** Only on products with the paper feeder (multi purpose) installed
*** To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17.
Selection Item Selectable Size/Type
Paper Size Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper
sizes are as follows.
Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement and Oficio II
Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, Folio, 16K, Executive
and Envelope C5
Media Type*** Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,　
Rough,Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick (163g/m
2
or less),
High Quality and Custom 1~8,
Selection Item Selectable Size/Type
Paper Size Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper
sizes are as follows.
Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,
and Oficio II
Metric size: A4, A5, B5, Folio and 16K
ISO B5, Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4)**,
Envelope C5, Youkei 2**, Custom*
Media Type*** Selectable media types are as follows.
Plain, Labels**, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Rough,
Cardstock**, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead,
Envelope**, Coated**, Thick (163g/m
2
or less), Thick
(164g/m
2
or more)**, High Quality and Custom 1~8
Preparation before Use
2-36
NOTE: If using the products equipped with the fax function, the available media types for printing received
faxes are as shown below.
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, Rough, and High Quality
When the paper size appears on the size dial
1Turn the size dial to set the paper size.
2Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
3In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
4Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
Login User Name:
L
b
********************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
5
User Property
*********************
7
Copy
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Preparation before Use
2-37
2
6Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select from [Cassette 1
Set.] to [Cassette 3 Set.].
NOTE: [Cassette 2 Set.] and [Cassette 3 Set.] are
shown when the optional cassettes are installed.
Follow the steps below when you select the main
unit cassette (Cassette 1). Operate in a similar
fashion when you select an optional cassette
(Cassette 2 or 3).
8Press the OK key. The Cassette 1 Set. menu
appears.
9
Select [Cassette 1 Type].
10
Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.
11
Press the U or V key to select the desired paper
type and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Cassette 1 Set. menu.
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
Cassette 1 Set.
:
a
b
*********************
[ Exit ]
1
Cassette 1 Type
Cassette 1 Type:
a
b
*********************
2
Rough
3
Recycled
1
*Plain
Preparation before Use
2-38
When the paper size does not appear on the size dial
1Turn the size dial to set "Other".
2Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
3In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
4Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
6Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
Login User Name:
L
b
********************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
5
User Property
*********************
7
Copy
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
Preparation before Use
2-39
2
7Press the U or V key to select from [Cassette 1
Set.] to [Cassette 3 Set.].
NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are shown when
the optional cassettes are installed.
Follow the steps below when you select the main
unit cassette (Cassette 1). Operate in a similar
fashion when you select an optional cassette
(Cassette 2 or 3).
8Press the OK key. The Cassette 1 Set. menu
appears.
9 Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Size].
NOTE: When the Paper Size Dial on the cassette is
set to a standard paper size, this setting does not
appear.
10 Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears.
11
Press the U or V key to select the desired paper
size and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Cassette 1 Set. menu.
12
Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Type].
Cassette 1 Set.
:
a
b
*********************
2
Cassette 1 Type
[ Exit ]
1
Cassette 1 Size
Cassette 1 Size
:
a
b
*********************
2
Legal
a
3
Statement
a
1
*Letter
a
Cassette 1 Set.
:
a
b
1
Cassette 1 Size
*********************
[ Exit ]
2
Cassette 1 Type
Preparation before Use
2-40
13
Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.
14
Press the U or V key to select the desired paper
type and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Cassette 1 Set. menu.
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray
To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size. When using other than a
plain paper, specify the media type.
NOTE: If using the products equipped with the fax function and the multi purpose tray is used to print a
received FAX, the available media types are as shown below.
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, Rough, and High Quality
Cassette 1 Type:
a
b
*********************
2
Rough
3
Recycled
1
*Plain
Item Description
Paper
Size Standard
Sizes Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes
are as follows.
Inch size: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, and Oficio
II
Metric size: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio and 16K
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9
(Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Size
Entry Enter the size not included in the standard size.
Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch size
X (Horizontal): 5.83~14.02" (in 0.01" increments),
Y (Vertical): 2.76~8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric size
X (Horizontal): 148~356 mm (in 1mm increments),
Y (Vertical): 70~216 mm (in 1mm increments)
Media Type Selectable media types are as follows.
Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Rough,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched,
Letterhead, Envelope, Coated, Thick, High Quality and
Custom 1~8*
* To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page
8-17.
Preparation before Use
2-41
2
1Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
2In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
3Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
5Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.].
7Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu
appears.
8Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Size].
Login User Name:
L
b
********************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
5
User Property
*********************
7
Copy
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
MP Tray Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
MP Tray Type
[ Exit ]
1
MP Tray Size
Preparation before Use
2-42
9Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears.
10
Press the U or V key to select the desired paper
size and then press the OK key.
If you select [Size Entry], use the numeric keys to
enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key,
and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the
OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the MP Tray Set. menu.
11
Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Type].
12
Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears.
13
Press the U or V key to select the desired paper
type and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the MP Tray Set. menu.
MP Tray Size:
a
b
*********************
2
Legal
a
3
Statement
a
1
*Letter
a
MP Tray Size:
a
b
*********************
2
Envelope #10
3
Envelope #9
1
*ISO B5
a
Size Entry(Y):
D
b
(5.83 - 14.02)
x
*
*
*11.49*
"
MP Tray Set.:
a
b
1
MP Tray Size
*********************
[ Exit ]
2
MP Tray Type
MP Tray Type:
a
b
*********************
2
Transparency
3
Rough
1
*Plain
Preparation before Use
2-43
2
Loading Originals
Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1Open the document processor.
NOTE: Before opening the document processor, be
sure that there are no originals left on the original table
or on the original eject table. Originals left on the
original table or on the original eject table may fall off
when the document processor is opened.
Keep the document processor open if the original is 25
mm or thicker.
2Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown
and align it flush against the original size indicator
plates with the back left corner as the reference
point.
3Close the document processor.
IMPORTANT: Do not push the document processor
forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may
crack the platen glass.
Do not close the document processor when the original
is 25 mm or thicker. The connector of the document
processor will be removed form the machine.
NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges
and in the middle of open-faced originals.
CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor
open as there is a danger of personal injury.
Preparation before Use
2-44
Loading Originals in the Document Processor
The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals
are scanned.
Part Names of the Document Processor
(1) Document processor cover
(2) Original width guides
(3) Original table
(4) Original eject table
(5) Original stopper
(6) Opening handle
Originals Supported by the Document Processor
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals.
• Soft originals such as vinyl sheets
• Transparencies such as OHP film
• Carbon paper
• Originals with very slippery surfaces
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Wet originals
• Originals with correction fluid which is not dried
• Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals
• Originals with cut-out sections
• Crumpled paper
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases
before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(4)
(5)
Weight 50 to 120 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 110 g/m2)
Size Maximum A4 to Minimum A5
Maximum Legal to Minimum Statement
Capacity Plain paper, Colored paper, Recycled paper,
High quality paper: 50 sheets
Thick paper (110 g/m2): 36 sheets
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 33 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
Preparation before Use
2-45
2
How to Load Originals
IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table.
Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
1Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals.
2Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or
the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide
the leading edge into the document processor as
far as it will go.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides
exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the
original width guides. The gap may cause the originals
to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the
level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may
cause the originals to jam (see the figure).
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines
should be placed in such a way that the holes or
perforations will be scanned last (not first).
NOTE: When the original has been inserted to the
correct position, an automatic document feeder image
will appear in the message display.
Preparation before Use
2-46
Installing Printer Driver
Ensure the machine is plugged in and connected to the PC before installing the printer driver from the CD-ROM.
Installing Printer Driver in Windows
If you are connecting this machine to a Windows PC, follow the next steps to install the printer driver. The
example shows you how to connect your machine to a Windows 7 PC.
NOTE: In Windows 7, Windows Vista, Windows XP and Windows 2000, you must be logged on with
administrator privileges.
You can use either Express Mode or Custom Mode to install the software. Express Mode automatically detects
connected machines and installs the required software. Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port
and select the software to be installed.
1Turn on the computer and start up Windows.
If the Welcome to the Found New Hardware
Wizard dialog box displays, select Cancel.
2Insert the CD-ROM supplied with the machine into
the optical drive of the PC. In Windows 7/Windows
Vista, the user account management window
appears. Click Allow.
The installation program launches.
NOTE: If the software install wizard does not launch
automatically, open the CD-ROM window in Windows
Explorer and double-click Setup.exe.
3Click View License Agreement and read the
License Agreement. Click Accept.
Preparation before Use
2-47
2
4Click Install Software. The software install wizard
starts up.
From this point, the procedure differs depending
on your version of Windows and your connection
method. Proceed to the correct procedure for your
connection type.
• Express Mode
• Custom Mode
Express Mode
In Express Mode, the installer automatically detects the machine when it is turned on. Use Express Mode for
standard connection methods.
1In the installation method selection window, select
Express Mode. The print system detection
window appears and the installer detects the
connected machines. If the installer does not
detect a print system, check that the print system
is connected via USB or a network and that it is
turned on. Then return to the print system
detection window.
NOTE: While the information shown in Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows XP installation dialog boxes
differs slightly, the installation procedure is the same.
2Select the print system to be installed and click
Next.
3You can customize the print system name in the
installation settings window. This will be the name
displayed in the Printer window and in the printer
lists displayed in applications. Specify whether to
share the print system name or set the print system
as an existing machine and then click Next.
IMPORTANT: Step 3 only appears if the print system is
connected via a network. It does not appear if the print
system is connected via a USB.
Preparation before Use
2-48
4A window appears in which you can check the
settings. Check the settings carefully and then
click Install.
NOTE: If the Windows security window appears, click
Install this driver software anyway.
5A message appears saying that the printer has
been installed successfully. Click Finish to exit the
printer installation wizard and return the CD-ROM
main menu.
If the device setup dialog box appears after you
click Finish, you can specify the settings for items
such as optional features installed in the print
system. You can also specify the device settings
after you exit the installation. For details, refer to
Device Settings in the printer driver operation
guide on the CD-ROM.
This completes the printer driver installation
procedure. Follow the on-screen instructions to
restart the system, if required.
Custom Mode
Use Custom Mode if you want to specify the printer port and select the software to be installed. For example, if
you do not want fonts installed on your computer to be replaced, select Custom Mode and deselect the Fonts
checkbox in the utility tab.
NOTE: Install TWAIN driver or WIA driver on your computer in this mode.
1Select Custom Mode.
2Following the instructions in the install wizard
window, select the software packages to be
installed and the specify the port, etc. For details,
refer to Custom Installation in the printer driver
operation guide on the CD-ROM.
Preparation before Use
2-49
2
Installing Printer Driver in Macintosh
1Turn on the machne and the Macintosh.
2Insert the included CD-ROM (Product Library) into
the CD-ROM drive.
3Double-click the CD-ROM icon.
4Double-click either OS X 10.2 and 10.3 Only, OS
X 10.4 Only or OS X 10.4 or higher depending on
your Mac OS version.
5Double-click Kyocera OS X vx.x.
6The printer driver installation program starts up.
Preparation before Use
2-50
7Choose Select Destination, Installation Type
and then install the printer driver as directed by the
instructions in the installation software.
In addition to Easy Install, the Installation Type
options include Custom Install, which allows you
to specify the components to be installed.
IMPORTANT: In the Authenticate screen, enter the
name and password used to log in to the operating
system. This completes the printer driver installation.
Next, specify the print settings. If an IP or AppleTalk
connection is used, the settings below are required. If a
USB connection is used, the machine is automatically
recognized and connected.
8Open System Preferences and click Print & Fax.
9Click the plus symbol (+) to add the installed printer
driver.
Preparation before Use
2-51
2
10 Click the IP icon for an IP connection or the
AppleTalk icon for an AppleTalk connection and
then enter the IP address and printer name.
11 Select the options available for the machine and
click Continue
12 The selected machine is added. This completes
the printer setup procedure.
Preparation before Use
2-52
Setting TWAIN Driver
Register this machine to the TWAIN Driver.
1Select Start button of the Windows display, All
Programs, Kyocera and then TWAIN Driver
Setting.
2Click Add.
3Enter the machine name in the Name field.
4Click T next to the Model field and select this
machine from the list.
5Enter the machine's IP address or host name in the
Scanner Address.
NOTE: When the machine’s IP address is unknown,
contact Administrator.
6Click User Authentication Settings. If user login
administration is invalid, go to Step 8.
Preparation before Use
2-53
2
7Select the checkbox beside Authentication, enter
Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and
Password (up to 64 characters) and then click OK.
8Click OK.
9The machine is registered to the PC and the
machine name and model name are displayed in
the Scanner List field.
NOTE: Click Delete to delete the added machine.
Click Edit to change names.
Setting WIA Driver (Windows 7, Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008)
Register this machine to the WIA Driver.
NOTE: The following is not necessary to register when using the machine possesses an IP address or host
name that you have specified during installation of WIA Driver.
1Click the Windows Start button and enter Scanner
in Program and File Search. Click Show
scanners and cameras in the search list.
The Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
NOTE: In Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008,
select the Windows Start button, Control Panel,
Hardware and Sound, and then Scanners and
Cameras.
Preparation before Use
2-54
2Select the same name as this machine from WIA
Drivers, and press the Properties.
NOTE: If Windows Security and User Account Control
are displayed, no trouble should be found with
operation after installing the driver and software we
have provided. Continue installation.
3Select the checkbox beside Authentication, enter
Login User Name (up to 64 characters) and
Password (up to 64 characters) and then click OK.
If user login administration is invalid, go to Step 4.
NOTE: When the machine’s IP address is unknown,
contact Administrator.
4Click Close.
The machine is registered to the PC.
3-1
3 Basic Operation
This chapter explains the following operations.
• Login/Logout.................................................................3-2
• One-Touch Keys and Program Keys ............................3-3
• Message Display ..........................................................3-6
• Copying ........................................................................3-7
• Printing - Printing from Applications ........................... 3-22
• Sending ......................................................................3-25
• Preparation for sending a document to a PC .............3-32
• Confirm Destination Screen ....................................... 3-43
• Specifying Destination ................................................ 3-44
• Scanning using TWAIN .............................................. 3-48
• Canceling Jobs........................................................... 3-50
• Checking Remaining Toner and Paper....................... 3-51
Basic Operation
3-2
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the Login User Name and Login Password to use
the machine.
NOTE: You will be unable to log in if you forget your Login User Name or Login Password. In this event, log in
with administrator privileges and change your Login User Name or Login Password.
By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already
stored. The following are the default user's properties.
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: 2600
Login Password: 2600
Access Level: Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, Login User Name and Login Password regularly for
your security.
Login
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1If the screen shown appears during operations,
enter the Login User Name.
2Press the V key. The input cursor moves to Login
Password.
3Enter the Login Password.
Press the U key to move the input cursor to Login
User Name.
4Check the Login User Name and Login Password
are correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select
key).
Logout
To logout from the machine, press the Logout to return
to the Login User Name/password entry screen.
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Basic Operation
3-3
3
One-Touch Keys and Program Keys
The one-touch keys and program keys on the operation panel are described below.
One-Touch Key
Register destinations to one-touch keys, and you can enter the desired destination by pressing the applicable
one-touch key. For registering a destination to a one-touch key, refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch
Key on page 8-145.
Entering Destination with One-touch Key
1In Address Entry, press the one-touch key where
the desired destination is registered.
Recalling from One-touch Keys 1 to 11
Press the one-touch key where the destination is
registered.
Recalling from One-touch Keys 12 to 22
Press the Shift Lock key to turn on the indicator
next to the keys, and then press the one-touch
key where the destination is registered.
2Complete. appears, and the stored address is
retrieved.
IMPORTANT: Any destination already entered is
overwritten.
Program Keys
Settings of various functions frequently used for copying and sending can be collectively registered as a
program. Then, you can change the current settings of various functions to the registered settings by just
pressing the applicable program key.
NOTE:
The following functions are already registered in
Program 1
key. This function allows you to copy the
front and back sides of ID card or other document that is smaller than Statement or A5 size onto a single page.
Although the functions are deleted by overwriting
Program 1
key, you can register the same settings using the
Function Menu
key.
Zoom Options: Auto Zoom
Combine: 2 in 1
Continuous Scan: On
Original Size: Statement/A5
Paper Selection: Cassette 1
Address Entry:
B
b
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Ready to send.
Dest.: 1
p
:sally@kyoceramita
N
1-sided 300x300dpi
[ Duplex ] [ScanRes.]
Basic Operation
3-4
ID Card Copy is printed on
the
Program 1
key.
When the functions are deleted by overwriting
Program 1
key, seal the label supplied with the
machine and write the function name in it.
The procedure for using ID Card copying is explained below.
1Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator
is off.
NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the
Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.
2Place the original on the platen.
Put the scanning side facedown in the center of
Statement or A5 size scanning area.
NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading
Originals on page 2-43.
3Press the Program 1.
The ID Card Copy function is recalled.
4Press the Start key. Scanning begins.
5Turn over the original on the platen and press the
Start key.
6After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the
Right Select key) to start copying.
Registering Settings
After making settings, press and hold the one of the
Program 1 to 4 keys where you want to register the
settings for 3 seconds. The current settings are
registered to the selected program key.
Recalled.
z
Program 1
Registered.
z
Program 1
Basic Operation
3-5
3
Changing and Deleting Settings
1Press and hold the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys
where the settings you want to change/delete are
registered for 3 seconds. Menu appears.
2To replace the registered settings with the current
settings, press the U or V key to select [Overwrite]
and then press the OK key. A confirmation screen
appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to
change the settings.
To delete the registered settings, press the U or V
key to select [Delete] and then press the OK key.
A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the
Left Select key) to delete the registered settings.
Recalling Settings
Press the one of the Program 1 to 4 keys where the settings you want to recall are registered. The current
settings of various functions are replaced with the registered settings.
Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Delete
1
Overwrite
Overwrite.
Are you sure?
z
Program 1
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Delete.
Are you sure?
z
Program 1
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Basic Operation
3-6
Message Display
The following examples explain the messages and icons used on the message display.
Reference
number Meaning
1Indicates the current status of the machine. Also displays the title of the current
menu whenever the operation panel is being used.
2Displays an icon that indicates the currently selected source of paper feed. The
meaning of each icon is as indicated below.
AThe standard paper cassette is currently selected. When this icon is
displayed as G , there is no paper is the cassette.
B
C The paper cassette for the optional paper feeder is currently selected.
When this icon is displayed as H or I , there is no paper is the cassette.
F The MP Tray is currently selected. When this icon is displayed as L, there
is no paper is the MP Tray.
3Displays the size of the original(s).
4Displays the current setting when there is a corresponding menu that can be
selected using the Left or Right Select keys.
5Displays the title of the corresponding menu that can be selected using the Left
or Right Select keys.
6Displays the number of copies.
7Displays the paper size to be copied.
8Displays the number of destinations.
9Displays the destination.
Ready to send.
Dest.: 1
p
:sally@kyoceramita
N
1-sided
[ Duplex ] [ ]
Ready to copy.
Copies: 1
A4
q
sA
A4
a
100%
[ Zoom ] [ ]
1
3
4
5
26
7
Copier Screen Send Screen
1
8
9
4
5
Basic Operation
3-7
3
Copying
Follow the steps as below for basic copying.
Part that is operated
1Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator
is off.
NOTE: If the Message Display is turned off, press the
Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading
Originals on page 2-43.
3The paper source for copying is the location
displayed on the panel.
When you need to change the paper source, use
the Paper Selection menu. If [Auto] is selected, the
most suitable paper source is automatically
selected.
For specifying the paper source, refer to Paper
Selection on page 4-4.
Ready to copy.
Copies: 1
Letter
q
sA
Letter
a
100%
[ Zoom ] [ Paper ]
Paper source
Paper Selection:
a
b
*********************
2
A
A4
a
Plain
3
B
A5
a
Plain
1
* Auto
Basic Operation
3-8
4Press the Auto Color key, Full Color key or
Black& White key to select the color mode.
NOTE: The setting of each key (color mode) is as
follows.
Auto Color key:
Automatically detects whether the original is color or
black & white and scans accordingly.
Full Color key:
Scans all documents in full color.
Black& White key:
Scans all documents in black & white.
5Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.
Specify the desired number up to 999.
6Press the Start key to start copying.
7Remove the finished copies from the top tray.
Basic Operation
3-9
3
Adjusting Density
Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying.
Part that is operated
NOTE: You may choose Auto mode as the default setting (refer to Density on page 8-37). When the color
mode is set to full color, automatic setting is not possible.
The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.
1Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Density].
3Press the OK key. Density appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].
Density Adjustment Option Description
Manual Adjust density using 7 levels.
Auto Optimum density is selected according
to the density of the original.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Density:
a
b
1
Auto
*********************
2
*Manual
Basic Operation
3-10
5Press the OK key.
When [Manual] is selected, Manual appears.
Press the U or V key to select your desired
density and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen.
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Manual:
a
b
*********************
2
v
Lighter -2
3
w
Lighter -1
1
u
Lighter -3
Basic Operation
3-11
3
Selecting Image Quality
Select image quality suited to the type of original.
Part that is operated
The table below shows the quality options.
The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.
1Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Original Image].
3Press the OK key. Original Image appears.
Image Quality Option Description
Text+Photo For originals with both text and
photographs.
Photo For photos taken with a camera.
Text For originals primarily consisting of text.
Map For maps, etc.
Printed Document For documents printed from this machine.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Original Image:
a
b
*********************
2
Photo
3
Text
1
*Text+Photo
Basic Operation
3-12
4Press the U or V key to select the image quality
suited to the type of original.
5Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the basic screen.
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Basic Operation
3-13
3
Zoom Copying
Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.
Part that is operated
Auto Zoom
Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image
suitably to the selected paper size.
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
Standard Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
Letter-R
Legal: 129 %
Statement-R: 64 %
A4: 141 %
A6: 70 %
A5
25 %
400 %
Basic Operation
3-14
The following magnifications are available.
The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.
1Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Zoom].
3Press the OK key. Zoom appears.
4Press the U or V key to select the desired
magnification.
To copy in the same size as the original, select
[100%].
To select automatic zoom, select [Auto].
Model Zoom Level (OriginalCopy)
Inch
Models Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 129% (Statement >> Letter),
78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement), 50%,
25% (Min.)
Other 141% (A5 >> A4), 115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4),
86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5)
Metric
Models Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4),
115% (B5 >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5), 70% (A4 >> A5),
50%, 25% (Min.)
Other 129% (Statement >> Letter), 90% (Folio >> A4),
78% (Legal >> Letter), 64% (Letter >> Statement)
Metric
Models
(Asia
Pacific)
Standard 100%, 400% (Max.), 200%, 141% (A5 >> A4),
115% (B5 >> A4), 90% (Folio >> A4), 86% (A4 >> B5),
70% (A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)
Other 129% (Statement >> Letter), 78% (Legal >> Letter),
64% (Letter >> Statement)
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Zoom:
a
b
*********************
2
Auto
3
Standard Zoom
1
*100%
Basic Operation
3-15
3
To use fixed magnifications, select [Standard
Zoom] and press the OK key. Standard Zoom
appears. Press the U or V key to select the
desired magnification. If you select [Other] and
press the OK key, you can select from additional
magnifications.
To enter a magnification, select [Zoom Entry] and
press the OK key. Zoom Entry appears. Use the
numeric keys to enter the any magnification.
5Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the basic screen.
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Standard Zoom:
a
b
*********************
2
200%
3
141% A5 >> A4
1
400%
Zoom Entry:
D
b
(25 - 400)
*****200
%
Basic Operation
3-16
Duplex Copying
Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available.
You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
The following modes are available.
Part that is operated
One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In
case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the
last copy will be blank.
The following binding options are available.
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on
the second sides are not rotated.
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the
second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be
bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation
when turning the pages.
Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two
individual sheets. The optional document processor is
required.
The following binding options are available.
Original Copy
5
4
3
2
1
5
3
4
1
2
ghi
def
abc
ghi
abc
def
ghi
abc
def
Original Copy
AB
2
1
1
2
Original Copy
Basic Operation
3-17
3
•Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides
are not rotated.
•Binding Top: Images on the second sides are
rotated 180°.
Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.
The optional document processor is required.
NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Legal, Letter, Oficio II, Executive, A4, B5,
A5 and Folio.
The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.
1Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Duplex].
3Press the OK key. Duplex appears.
4Press the U or V key to select the desired duplex
copying mode.
If you select [1-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the
Right Select key) and you can select the binding
edge of the finished copies and the original setting
orientation.
Original Copy
5
3
4
1
2
5
3
4
1
2
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Duplex:
a
b
*********************
2
1-sided>>2-sided
3
2-sided>>1-sided
1
*1-sided>>1-sided
Finish. Binding:
a
b
*********************
2
p
Top
1
*
o
Left/Right
Basic Operation
3-18
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge
of the finished copies and the original setting
orientation.
If you select [2-sided>>1-sided], press [Detail] (the
Right Select key) and you can select the binding
edge of the original and the original setting
orientation.
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge
of the original and finished copies, and the original
setting orientation.
If you select [2-sided>>2-sided], press [Detail] (the
Right Select key) and you can select the binding
edge of the original and the original setting
orientation.
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge
of the finished copies and the original setting
orientation.
After pressing the OK key, select the binding edge
of the original and finished copies, and the original
setting orientation.
5Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the basic screen.
Orig.Orientation:
a
b
*********************
2
d
Top Edge left
1
*
c
Top Edge Top
Orig. Binding:
a
b
*********************
2
p
Top
1
*
o
Left/Right
Orig.Orientation:
a
b
*********************
2
d
Top Edge left
1
*
c
Top Edge Top
Orig. Binding:
a
b
*********************
2
p
Top
1
*
o
Left/Right
Finish. Binding:
a
b
*********************
2
d
Top Edge left
1
*
c
Top Edge Top
Orig.Orientation:
a
b
*********************
2
d
Top Edge left
1
*
c
Top Edge Top
Basic Operation
3-19
3
6Press the Start key. Copying begins.
If the original is placed on the platen, replace it with
the next one before pressing the Start key.
If there is no next original, press [End Scan] (the
Right Select key). Copying begins.
Scanning...
Job No.: 9999
Page(s):
1
[ Cancel ]
Set original
and press Start key.
Job No.: 9999
Page(s):
3
[ Cancel ] [End Scan]
Basic Operation
3-20
Collate Copying
The machine can collate at the same time as it copies.
Part that is operated
You can use the Collate copy function for tasks such as those shown below.
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of
copies as required according to page number.
The procedure for using collate copying is explained
below.
1Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Collate].
3Press the OK key. Collate appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
Original Copy
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Collate:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
Basic Operation
3-21
3
5Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the basic screen.
6Press the Start key Copying begins.
Basic Operation
3-22
Printing - Printing from Applications
Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied
CD-ROM (Product Library).
1Create a document using an application.
2Click File and select Print in the application. The
Print dialog box appears.
3Click the T button next to the Name field and
select this machine from the list.
4Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of
copies box. Enter any number up to 999.
When there is more than one document, select
Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of
the page numbers.
5Click Properties button. The Properties dialog
box appears.
Basic Operation
3-23
3
6Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to
select the paper size.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or
transparency, click the Media Type menu and
select the media type.
7Click Source and select the paper source.
NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, papers are
supplied automatically from the paper source loaded
with paper of optimum size and type. To print on
special paper such as envelope or thick paper, place it
on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray.
8Select paper orientation, either Portrait or
Landscape, to match the orientation of the
document.
Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document
rotated 180°.
9Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.
10
Click OK button to start printing.
Basic Operation
3-24
Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print
settings, open the printer driver print settings screen
and display Help as explained below.
• Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the
screen and then click the item you want to know
about.
• Click the item you want to know about and press
the [F1] key on your keyboard.
Basic Operation
3-25
3
Sending
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the
network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the
network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended
that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box.
To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps:
• Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.
• Use COMMAND CENTER (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the
SMTP server, and the recipient.
• Register the destination in the Address Book or One-touch keys.
• When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. For setting-up
the PC Folder, contact your administrator.
• Detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image
at the same time)
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.
• Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-26
• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-28
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-28
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible
application program...page 5-31
NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-47.
Basic Operation
3-26
Send as E-mail
Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
Part that is operated
NOTE:
• You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is
recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any
time over a LAN.
• Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For
details, see COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-23.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1Press the Send key.
Displays the screen for sending.
2Press the U or V key to select [E-mail].
3Press the OK key. Address Entry appears.
Send to:
a
b
*********************
2
G
Folder(SMB)
3
H
Folder(FTP)
1
p
E-mail
Address Entry:
B
b
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Basic Operation
3-27
3
4Enter the destination e-mail address.
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the
Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-44.
5Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the basic screen.
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new
destination (page 8-72) is set to [On], a screen to
confirm the entered e-mail address appears. Enter the
same e-mail address again and press the OK key.
6If there are additional destinations, press the
Confirm/Add Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to
5 to enter additional destinations. Up to 100
destinations can be specified.
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the
basic screen.
Press the Confirm/Add Destination key to
confirm or delete the registered destinations.
Press the U or V key to select a destination and
press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the
destination.
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the
basic screen.
7Press the Start key. Transmission starts.
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination
before transmission (page 8-72) is set to [On], the
Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start
key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm
Destination Screen on page 3-43.
Ready to send.
Dest.: 1
p
:sally@kyoceramita
N
1-sided 300x300dpi
[ Duplex ] [ScanRes.]
Dest. Confirm.:
a
b
*********************
p
aaaaaaaaa@kyoceram
N
p
bbbbbbbbb@kyoceram
N
[ Add ] [ Exit ]
p
Morgan@kyoceramita
N
Basic Operation
3-28
Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP)
Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC.
Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
Part that is operated
NOTE:
• Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder.
• Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA
COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1Press the Send key.
Displays the screen for sending.
2Press the U or V key to select [Folder(SMB)] or
[Folder(FTP)].
Send to:
a
b
1
p
E-mail
*********************
3
H
Folder(FTP)
2
G
Folder(SMB)
Basic Operation
3-29
3
3Press the OK key. Host Name(SMB) or Host
Name(FTP) appears.
4Enter the host name.
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the
Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-44.
5Press the OK key. Path appears.
6Enter the path name. Consider, that the share
name but not the folder name on the destination
PC has to be typed in.
7Press the OK key. Login User Name appears.
8Enter the Login User Name. You have to enter the
account name of the destination PC.
9Press the OK key. Login Password appears.
10
Enter the Login Password. You have to enter the
password of the account on the destination PC.
11
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
Host Name(SMB):
A
b
Osaka SD
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Host Name(FTP):
A
b
Osaka SD
*
ABC
[ Text ]
or
Path:
A
b
SD3\report
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Login User Name:
C
b
Maury
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Login Password:
A
b
OOOOOOOOOOO
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Check the connection.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Basic Operation
3-30
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new
destination (page 8-72) is set to [On], screens to
confirm the entered host name and path name appear.
Enter the same host name and path name again and
press the OK key on their respective screens.
Data to be entered are as follows.
NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your Login User Name or Login Password. Contact
your administrator and check your Login User Name or Login Password.
For send to folder (SMB)
For send to folder (FTP)
Item Data to be entered Max.
characters
Host Name
(SMB)* Host name or IP address of the PC to
receive the data. Up to 64
characters
Path Path to the receiving folder such as
follows.
For example, User\Sharename.
Up to 128
characters
Login User
Name User name to access the PC
For example, abcdnet\james.smith Up to 64
characters
Login
Password Password to access the PC Up to 64
characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (139), enter using
the format “host name: port number” (e.g., SMBhostname: 140).
Item Data to be entered Max.
characters
Host Name
(FTP)* Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64
characters
Path Path to the receiving folder.
For example, User\ScanData.
Otherwise the data will be saved in the
home directory.
Up to 128
characters
Login User
Name FTP server log-in user name Up to 64
characters
Login
Password FTP server log-in password Up to 64
characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using
the format “host name: port number” (e.g., FTPhostname: 140).
Basic Operation
3-31
3
12
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a
connection with the entered destination.
If the connection is successful, Connected. is
displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right
Select key). Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the basic screen.
If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is
displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The
screen shown in step 3 reappears. Check and re-
enter the destination.
13
If there are additional destinations, press the Add
Destination key. Repeat steps 2 to 12 to enter
additional destinations. Up to 100 destinations can
be specified.
14
Press the Confirm/Add Destination key to
confirm the registered destinations.
Press the U or V key to select a destination and
press the OK key. Then, you can edit or delete the
destination.
Press [Exit] (the Right Select key) to return to the
basic screen.
15
Press the Start key. Transmission starts.
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the destination
before transmission (page 8-72) is set to [On], the
Confirm Destination screen appears when the Start
key is pressed. For more information, refer to Confirm
Destination Screen on page 3-43.
Dest. Confirm.:
a
b
p
Morgan@kyoceramita
N
*********************
b
0667741234
[ Add ] [ Exit ]
b
0667640000
Dest. Confirm.:
a
b
*********************
[ Add ] [ Exit ]
OSAKA SD
Basic Operation
3-32
Preparation for sending a document to a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in
other versions of Windows.
NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Checking what to enter for [Host Name]
Check the name of the destination computer.
1From the Start menu, select Computer and then
System Properties.
Check the computer name in the window that
appears.
In Windows XP, right-click My Computer and select
Properties. The System Properties dialog box
appears. Click the Computer Name tab in the
window that appears and check the computer
name.
If there is a workgroup
All characters appearing in "Full computer name"
should be entered in Host Name. (Example:
PC4050)
If there is a domain
The characters to the left of the first dot (.) in "Full
computer name" should be entered in Host Name.
(Example: pc4050)
2After checking the computer name, click the
(Close) button to close the System Properties
screen.
In Windows XP, after checking the computer name,
click the Cancel button to close the System
Properties screen.
Checking what to enter for [Login User Name]
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1From the Start menu, select All Programs (or
Programs), Accessories and then Command
Prompt.
The Command Prompt window appears.
Basic Operation
3-33
3
2At the Command Prompt, enter "net config
workstation" and then click Enter.
Screen example: user name "james.smith" and
domain name "ABCDNET"
Basic Operation
3-34
Creating a Shared Folder
Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE: If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a
specific user or group.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, Appearance and Personalization, and then Folder Options.
Windows XP, click My Computer and select Folder Options in Tools.
2 Click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended) in Advanced
settings.
In Windows XP, click the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use Simple File Sharing
(Recommended) in Advanced settings.
3 Click the OK button to close the Folder Options screen.
1Create a folder on the local disk (C).
NOTE: For example, create a folder with the name
"scannerdata" on the local disk (C).
2Right-click the scannerdata folder and click Share
and Advanced sharing. Click the Advanced
Sharing button.
The scannerdata Properties dialog box appears.
Basic Operation
3-35
3
In Windows XP, right-click the scannerdata folder
and select Sharing and Security... (or Sharing).
3Select the Share this folder checkbox and click
the Permissions button.
The Permissions for scannerdata dialog box
appears.
In Windows XP, select Share this folder and click
the Permissions button.
4Click the Add button.
5Enter the user name in the text box and click the
OK button.
Basic Operation
3-36
6Select the entered user, select the Change and
Read permissions, and click the OK button.
In Windows XP, go to step 8.
NOTE: "Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it is
recommended that you select Everyone and remove the Read permission checkmark.
7Click the OK button in the Advanced Sharing
screen to close the screen.
8Click the Security tab and then click the Edit
button.
In Windows XP, click the Security tab and then
click the Add button.
9Proceed in the same way as in step 5 to add a user
to Group or user names.
Basic Operation
3-37
3
10 Select the added user, select the Modify and Read
& execute permissions, and then click the OK
button.
Checking the [Path]
Check the share name of the shared folder that will be the destination for the document.
1Enter "\\pc4050" in "Program and File Search" in
the Start menu.
The Search Results screen opens.
In Windows XP, click Search in the Start menu,
select All files and folders, and search for the
destination computer to which the file will be sent.
In Search Companion, click Computers or people
and then A computer on the network.
In the "Computer name:" text box, enter the name
of the computer that you checked (pc4050) and
then click Search.
2Click "\\pc4050\scannerdata" that appears in the
search results.
In Windows XP, double-click the computer
("pc4050") that appears in the search results.
3Check the folder that appears.
Check the address bar. The third and following text
strings (f ) should be entered for the path.
In Windows XP, double-click the scannerdata
folder and check the address bar. The text string to
the right of the third backslash (\) should be
entered in Path.
(Example: scannerdata)
Basic Operation
3-38
NOTE: You can also specify a subfolder in the shared folder as the location where data is to be sent. In this
case, "share name\name of folder in the shared folder" should be entered for the Path. In the example window
above, "scannerdata\projectA" is the Path.
Basic Operation
3-39
3
Configuring Windows Firewall (for Windows 7)
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
NOTE: Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
Checking file and printer sharing
1From the Start menu, select Control Panel,
System and Security, and Allow a program
through Windows Firewall.
NOTE: If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.
2Click Change settings, select the File and
Printer Sharing checkbox, and click OK.
Adding a port
1From the Start menu, select Control Panel,
System and Security, and Check firewall
status.
Basic Operation
3-40
2Click Advanced settings.
3Click Inbound Rules.
4Click New Rule.
5Select Port and click Next.
Basic Operation
3-41
3
6Select TCP, select Specific local ports, enter
"139", and click Next.
7Select Allow the connection and click Next.
8Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click
Next.
Basic Operation
3-42
9Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click Finish.
NOTE: In Windows XP or Windows Vista, follow the procedure below to set the port.
1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, System and Security (or Security Center), and then Check
Firewall Status) (or Windows Firewall).
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the Continue button.
2 Click the Exceptions tab and then the Add port... button.
3 Specify Add a Port settings.
Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port. Enter "139" in "Port
Number". Select TCP for "Protocol".
4 Click the OK button to close the Add a Port dialog box.
Basic Operation
3-43
3
Confirm Destination Screen
If the screen for confirming the destination before transmission (page 8-72) is set to [On], Check through the all
destination and press [Next]. appears when the Start key is pressed.
Part that is operated
Use the procedure below to operate the Confirm Destination screen.
1Press the U or V key to check all destinations.
The OK key can be pressed to check details or
delete the selected address.
To add a destination, press [Cancel] (the Left
Select key) to return to the previous screen.
2After the checking is finished, press [Next] (the
Right Select key). Press Start key. is displayed on
the screen.
If there are destinations that are hidden and not yet
checked, the screen displays Check the
destination list through the end. and returns to the
Destination List screen. Check all destinations.
Destination List:
a
b
*********************
b
0667640000
b
0667741234
[ Cancel ] [ Next ]
p
Morgan@kyoceramita
N
p
Morgan@kyoceram
Na
b
1
Detail
2
Delete
Press Start key.
[ Cancel ]
Check the destination
list through the end.
Basic Operation
3-44
3Place the original on the platen or in the document
processor, and press the Start key. Transmission
starts.
Specifying Destination
When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One-touch keys.
Part that is operated
Choosing from the Address Book
Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
1In the basic screen for sending, press the Address
Book key. The Select Addr Book menu appears.
NOTE: If extended address book is not registered,
[Ext Address Book] is not displayed.
2Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] and
then press the OK key. Address Book appears.
To use an address book on the LDAP server, select
[Ext Address Book].
3Press the U or V key to select the desired user or
group, and then press the OK key.
If you select a user, the list of destinations
registered to the user appears.
If you select a group, proceed to step 5.
Select Addr Book:
a
b
*********************
t
Ext Address Book
[ Exit ]
t
Address Book
Address Book:
a
b
*********************
l
Fiala
l
Maury
[ Menu ]
k
Design
l
Fiala:
a
b
*********************
p
fiala@kyoceramita.
N
SMB-PC
[ Menu ]
b
0667643277
Basic Operation
3-45
3
4Press the U or V key to select the desired
destination and then press the OK key.
5Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen.
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.
The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below.
Search in Address Book
1In Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right Select
key). Menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Search(Name)]
and then press the OK key. A search screen
appears.
3Enter the characters you want to search.
4Press the OK key. The address book appears with
the user that starts with the entered character
string at the top.
Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Detail
3
Search(Name)
1
Select
Address Book:
a
b
*********************
l
Fiala
l
Maury
[ Menu ]
k
Design
Search(Name):
A
b
ma
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Address Book:
a
b
*********************
l
Morgan
l
Sally
[ Menu ]
l
Maury
Basic Operation
3-46
Search in Extended Address Book
1In Ext Address Book, press [Menu] (the Right
Select key). Menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Search] and then
press the OK key. A search screen appears.
3Enter the characters you want to search.
If you press [Menu] (the Right Select key) and
then the OK key, Search by appears where you
can specify the search key and match condition.
Select the desired item for each and then press the
OK key.
4Press the OK key. The address book appears with
the user that starts with the entered character
string at the top.
NOTE:
If you first open the extended address book,
the search screen appears first. Then, operate from
step 3.
Choosing by One-Touch Key
Select the destination using the One-touch keys.
In the basic screen for sending or the destination entry
screen, press the one-touch key where the destination
is registered.
NOTE: Refer to Adding a Destination on One-touch Key on page 8-145 for more information on adding one-
touch keys.
Ext Address Book:
a
b
*********************
l
Maury
l
Morgan
[ Menu ]
l
Fiala
Menu:
a
b
1
Select
2
Detail
*********************
3
Search
Search(Name):
A
b
ma
*
S
ABC
[ Menu ] [ Text ]
Ext Address Book:
a
b
*********************
l
Morgan
l
Sally
[ Menu ]
l
Maury
Basic Operation
3-47
3
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (Only on
products with the fax function installed). This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to
different types of destination (e-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation.
No. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100
Folders (SMP, FTP) : Total of 1 SMB and FTP
FAX : Up to 100
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail
address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to
all destinations at one time.
Basic Operation
3-48
Scanning using TWAIN
This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN.
The procedure for scanning using the TWAIN driver is explained as an example. The WIA driver is used in the
same way.
1Activate the TWAIN compatible application.
2Select the machine using the application and
display the TWAIN dialog box.
NOTE: For selecting the machine, see the Operation
Guide or Help for each application software.
3Select scanning settings in the TWAIN dialog box
that opens.
The settings that appear in the TWAIN dialog box
are as follows.
Basic Operation
3-49
3
4Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
5Click the Scan button
The document data is scanned.
Item Detail
Original
Configurations
Original Size Select the scan size of the original.
Original
Orientation Specify the type of binding.
Send
Configurations
Duplex Setting Specify whether the original is one-sided or two-sided.
Image Quality
Configurations
Color Setting Select the color mode.
Resolution Select the resolution.
Image
Quality
Select the image quality according to the type of original.
Image Quality
Settings Density Select the exposure.
Select the Auto button to have the exposure set automatically based on the
original.
Configuration This is used to check current settings and store frequently used settings. When
the Configuration button is clicked, a setting screen opens with buttons for
Details, Add current configuration, and Delete selected configuration.
Details Current settings can be checked.
Add current
configuration Save current settings with a name and comment.
Delete selected
configuration Delete saved settings.
Basic Operation
3-50
Canceling Jobs
Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.
Canceling Jobs
You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key.
1During a printing or sending job, press the Stop
key. The Job Cancel List menu appears.
NOTE: Pressing the Stop key pauses a printing job
but does not pause a sending job.
2Press the U or V key to select the type of job you
want to stop, and then press the OK key. An output
queue of the selected job type is displayed.
3Press the U or V key to select the job you want to
stop, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select
key). Menu appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Cancel Job] and
then press the OK key. A confirmation screen
appears.
5Press [Yes] (the Right Select key). The screen
displays Canceling.... and returns to the output
queue of the selected job type after the job is
canceled.
To cancel other jobs, repeat steps 3 to 5.
Job Cancel List:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job List
3
Store Job List
[ Exit ]
1
Print Job List
Print Job List:
a
b
********************
**
0009
W
maury's data
s
0010
W
Microsoftwor
Ns
[ Resume ] [ Menu ]
0008
r
Copy
s
Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Cancel Job
1
Detail
Job will be canceled.
Are you sure?
z
0008
r
Copy
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Basic Operation
3-51
3
Checking Remaining Toner and Paper
You can check the remaining amount of toner and that of paper in each feeder cassette.
Checking Remaining Toner
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Toner Status].
3Press the OK key. Toner Status appears.
The remaining amount of toner is displayed in one
of 5 levels.
Checking Remaining Paper
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Paper Status].
3Press the OK key. Paper Status appears.
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display of
remaining paper amount among the main unit
cassette, optional cassette (if installed) and MP
tray.
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Toner Status:
b
C
VVVVE
M
VVVVE
Y
VVVVE
K
VVVVE
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Paper Status:
C
b
Cassette 1: 1/ 4
Letter
a
Empty
Plain
Basic Operation
3-52
4-1
4 Copying Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for copying.
• Original Size .................................................................4-2
• Paper Selection ............................................................4-4
• Original Orientation....................................................... 4-8
• EcoPrint......................................................................4-10
• Combine Mode ........................................................... 4-11
• Continuous Scan ........................................................4-14
• Job Finish Notice........................................................4-15
• File Name Entry..........................................................4-17
• Print Override .............................................................4-18
• Color Selection ........................................................... 4-19
• Color Balance.............................................................4-20
• Sharpness .................................................................. 4-22
• Background Density ...................................................4-23
• Saturation ................................................................... 4-25
Copying Functions
4-2
Original Size
Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to select the original size before starting the copying
process.
Part that is operated
The following options are available.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Original Size].
Item How to Select Sizes
Standard
Sizes Select from
standard sizes,
envelope,
postcard or the
custom sized
originals*.
* For instructions on how to specify the custom original size,
refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.
Use the procedure below to select the original size.
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,
Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio,
16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope
C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei
4, Youkei 2 and Custom
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Copying Functions
4-3
4
5Press the OK key. Original Size appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the desired original
size and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
7Press the Start key to start copying.
Original Size:
a
b
*********************
2
Legal
q
3
Statement
q
1
*Letter
q
Original Size:
a
b
*********************
2
Envelope #10
3
Envelope #9
1
*ISO B5
q
Copying Functions
4-4
Paper Selection
Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.
Part that is operated
NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper
Settings on page 8-8).
Selecting the Cassette
Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection].
5Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the desired paper
size.
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of
the original is selected automatically.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Paper Selection:
a
b
*********************
2
A
Letter
a
Plain
3
B
Custom
a
Plain
1
* Auto
Copying Functions
4-5
4
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
8Press the Start key to start copying.
Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray
Change the paper size and media type.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them
as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-15).
Category Item How to
Select Sizes
Paper
Size Standard
Sizes Select from
the standard
size,
envelope,
postcard or
the custom
sized
originals
Letter, Legal, Statement,
Executive, Oficio II, A4, A5,
A6, B5, B6, Folio, 16K, ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope
#9, Envelope #6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki,
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2 and Custom*
* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size (Custom),
refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on
page 8-11.
Size
Entry Enter the
size not
included in
the standard
sizes 1 and
2**.
** The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-26.
Inch models
Horizontal: 5.83 to 14.02" (in
0.01" increments), Vertical: 2.76
to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Vertical: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm
increments), Horizontal: 148 to
356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Media
Type
Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Rough,
Preprinted***, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched***,
Letterhead***, Envelope, Coated, Thick, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8***
*** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8,
refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to
Special Paper Action on page 8-23.
Copying Functions
4-6
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection].
5Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.].
7Press the OK key. MP Tray Set. appears.
8Press the U or V key to select [Standard Size] or
[Size Entry] and press the OK key, select the
desired paper size, and then press the OK key.
If you select [Size Entry], using the numeric keys to
enter the Y (vertical) size and press the OK key,
and then enter the X (horizontal) size and press the
OK key.
9Press the U or V key to select the desired paper
type and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Paper Selection:
a
b
*********************
2
A
A4
a
Plain
3
B
A5
a
Plain
1
* Auto
MP Tray Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Size Entry
1
*Standard Size
Size Entry(Y):
D
b
(5.83 - 14.02)
******
x
11.49 "
Media Type:
a
b
*********************
2
Transparency
3
Rough
1
*Plain
Copying Functions
4-7
4
10
Place paper in the multi purpose tray.
11
Press the Start key to start copying.
If Add paper in MP tray. is displayed during the
copying process, add paper in the multi purpose
tray, and then press the OK key. Copying then
resumes.
Copying Functions
4-8
Original Orientation
Select the original orientation to use the following functions.
• Duplex
• Combine mode
When placing originals on the platen
When placing originals on the document processor
NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Orig.Orientation on page 8-29.
[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]
[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]
Copying Functions
4-9
4
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation].
5Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [Top Edge Top] or
[Top Edge Left].
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
8Press the Start key to start copying.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Orig.Orientation:
a
b
1
c
Top Edge Top
*********************
2
*
d
Top Edge Left
Copying Functions
4-10
EcoPrint
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high
quality print is unnecessary.
The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint].
5Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
7Press the Start key to start copying.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
EcoPrint:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Copying Functions
4-11
4
Combine Mode
This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The
page boundary of each original can be indicated.
Part that is operated
NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Folio, A4, B5, Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Statement
and 16K.
2-in-1 Mode
For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals
onto one sheet.
The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
Original
Document processorPlaten
Orientation of OriginalCopy
Copying Functions
4-12
4-in-1 Mode
For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals
onto one sheet.
The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
Types of Page Boundary Lines
The following types of the boundary lines are available.
The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
Original
Document processorPlaten
Orientation of OriginalCopy
None DottedSolid Positioning
Mark
Copying Functions
4-13
4
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Combine].
5Press the OK key. Combine appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [2 in1] or [4 in 1].
7Press [Detail] (the Right Select key).
8Press the U or V key to select the desired layout
and then press the OK key.
9Press the U or V key to select the desired border
line type and then press the OK key.
10
Press the U or V key to select the orientation of
the original and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
11
Press the Start key. Scanning begins.
If the original is placed on the platen, replace the
original and press the Start key.
After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the
Right Select key) to start copying.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Combine:
a
b
*********************
2
2 in 1
3
4 in 1
[ Detail ]
1
*Off
2 in 1 Layout:
a
b
*********************
2
e
R to L
1
*
g
L to R
f
T to B
Border Line:
a
b
*********************
2
l
Solid Line
3
m
Dotted Line
1
* None
Orig.Orientation:
a
b
1
c
Top Edge Top
*********************
2
*
d
Top Edge Left
Copying Functions
4-14
Continuous Scan
When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you
press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).
The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan].
4Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
6Place the originals in the document processor or
on the platen and press the Start key.
7Place the next original and press the Start key.
Repeat these steps to scan the remaining
originals.
After scanning all originals, press [End Scan] (the
Right Select key) to start copying.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Continuous Scan:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Copying Functions
4-15
4
Job Finish Notice
Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while
working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.
NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
Example of Job Finish Notice
Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [JobFinish Notice].
To: h_pttr@owl-net.net
Subject: 1234 Job end report mail
Job No.: 000002
Result: OK
End Time: Wed 28 Apr 2010 14:56:08
File Name: doc28042010145608
Job Type: Copy
------------------------------------------------
1234
[00:c0:ee:d0:01:14]
------------------------------------------------
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Copying Functions
4-16
5Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
7Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] or
[Address Entry], and then press the OK key.
8If you select [Address Book], select [Address
Book] on the next screen and press the OK key,
and then select the notice destination.
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select
[Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to
view the details of the selected notice destination.
If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of
the notice destination.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
9Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
10
Press the Start key to start copying. Upon
completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to
the selected destination.
JobFinish Notice:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Destination:
a
b
*********************
2
Address Entry
1
*Address Book
Address Book:
a
b
*********************
p
Maury
p
Morgan
[ Menu ]
p
Fiala
Address Entry:
B
b
******@abcdefg.jp
ABC
[ Text ]
Copying Functions
4-17
4
File Name Entry
Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a
job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry].
5Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears.
6Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional
Info. appears.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
7Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and
then press the OK key.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
8Press the Start key to start copying.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
File Name Entry:
A
b
File_2010
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Copying Functions
4-18
Print Override
This function allows you to suspend the current print job when you need to make copies immediately. When the
interrupt copy job is completed, the machine resumes the suspended print job.
1Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Print Override].
3Press the OK key. Print Override appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [On].
5Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed, the
machine is put into the interruption copy mode, and
the basic screen appears.
6Perform the interrupt copy job in the same fashion
as a normal copy job. When the interrupt copy job
is completed, the machine resumes the
suspended print job.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Print Override:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Copying Functions
4-19
4
Color Selection
Select the color mode for copying. To select the color mode, you can also select from the Auto Color key, Full
Color key or Black & White key.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection].
5Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the desired color
mode and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
7Press the Start key to start copying.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Color Selection:
a
b
*********************
2
Full Color
3
Black & White
1
*Auto Color
Copying Functions
4-20
Color Balance
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color copying.
This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density on page 3-9.
Refer to the sample image in Color balance adjustment on Appendix-21.
Follow the steps below to adjust color balance.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Color Balance].
5Press the OK key. Color Balance appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On].
7Press the OK key. A selection menu for the color to
be adjusted appears.
8Press the U or V key to select the color to be
adjusted.
9Press the OK key. The color adjustment menu
appears.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Color Balance:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Color Balance:
a
b
*********************
2
Magenta
3
Yellow
1
Cyan
Cyan:
a
b
*********************
2
-4
3
-3
1
*-5
Copying Functions
4-21
4
10 Press the U or V key to select the color intensity.
A larger negative value makes the color fainter,
and a larger positive value makes the color more
intense.
11 Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
12 Press the Start key to start copying.
Copying Functions
4-22
Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear
copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned
dots such as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire
effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen].
* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Refer to the sample image in Appendix-22.
Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Sharpness].
5Press the OK key. Sharpness appears.
6Press the U or V key to adjust the sharpness. A
larger negative value decreases the sharpness,
and a larger positive value increases the
sharpness.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
8Press the Start key to start copying.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Sharpness:
a
b
*********************
2
-2
3
-1
1
*-3(Unsharpen)
Copying Functions
4-23
4
Background Density
Lightens the background of color originals with dark backgrounds.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Background Density Adjust is disabled
during auto color copying when the a black & white original has been detected.
Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Backgrnd Density].
5Press the OK key. Backgrnd Density appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On].
7Press the OK key. A setting menu for the density of
the ground color appears.
Original Copy
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Backgrnd Density:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Backgrnd Density:
a
b
*********************
2
2
3
3
1
1 (Lighter)
Copying Functions
4-24
8Press the U or V key to select the density of the
ground color. A smaller value decreases the
density of the ground color, and a larger value
increases the density.
9Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
10 Press the Start key to start copying.
Copying Functions
4-25
4
Saturation
Adjust the color saturation of the image.
The procedure for adjusting the color saturation is explained below.
1Press the Copy key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Saturation].
5Press the OK key. Saturation appears.
6Press the U or V key to adjust the color
saturation. A larger negative value reduces the
saturation, resulting in paler color in the copy. A
larger positive value increases the saturation,
resulting in more vivid color.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for copying.
8Press the Start key to start copying.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Selection
g
Saturation:
a
b
*********************
2
-2
3
-1
1
*-3(Grayish)
Copying Functions
4-26
5-1
5 Sending Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals.
• Original Size .................................................................5-2
• Sending Size ................................................................ 5-4
• Zoom ............................................................................ 5-6
• Duplex Sending ............................................................5-8
• Original Orientation..................................................... 5-10
• File Format .................................................................5-12
• File Separation ........................................................... 5-14
• Original Image ............................................................ 5-15
• Adjusting Density........................................................5-16
• Scan Resolution ......................................................... 5-18
• Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection........... 5-19
• Continuous Scan ........................................................5-20
• File Name Entry..........................................................5-21
• Subject and Body Entry.............................................. 5-22
• Sharpness .................................................................. 5-23
• Background Density ...................................................5-24
• WSD Scan.................................................................. 5-26
• Job Finish Notice........................................................5-28
• FTP Encrypted TX......................................................5-30
• Scanning Image using Application ............................. 5-31
• About Color Profiles.................................................... 5-31
Sending Functions
5-2
Original Size
Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size before
starting the sending process.
Part that is operated
Choose the original size from the following groups of original size.
Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Original Size].
Item Detail Size
Standard
Sizes Select from
standard sizes,
Hagaki and
Custom Original
Size *.
* Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size, refer to
Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,
Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio,
16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope
#9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki,
Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
and Custom
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Sending Functions
5-3
5
5Press the OK key. Original Size appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the desired original
size and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
7Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Original Size:
a
b
*********************
2
Legal
q
3
Statement
q
1
*Letter
q
Original Size:
a
b
*********************
>
Envelope #10
?
Envelope #9
=
*ISO B5
q
Sending Functions
5-4
Sending Size
Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).
Part that is operated
The table below lists the sizes.
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 5-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 5-6) are related to each other. Refer to the following
table.
NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you
can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.
Item Detail Size
Standard
Sizes Select from Same
as Original Size,
Standard Size,
envelope, postcard
or the custom sized
originals*.
* For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to
Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-8.
Same as OrigSize, Legal, Letter,
Statement, Executive, Offcio II, A4, A5,
A6, B5, B6, Folio and 16K, ISO B5,
Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope
#6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki,
Youkei 4 and Youkei 2
Original Size and the size you
wish to send as are the same different
Original Size Specify as
necessary Specify as
necessary
Sending Size Select [Same as
OrigSize] Select the
required size
Zoom Select [100%]
(or [Auto]) Select [Auto]
Sending Functions
5-5
5
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Sending Size].
5Press the OK key. Sending Size appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the desired sending
size.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Sending Size:
a
b
*********************
2
Letter
3
Legal
1
*Same as OrigSize
Sending Size:
a
b
*********************
>
Envelope #10
?
Envelope #9
=
*ISO B5
Sending Functions
5-6
Zoom
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.
Part that is operated
The table below lists the available options.
NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size on page 5-4 when selecting the sending size.
When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size, the originals are sent at normal size and
zooming cannot be used.
Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper.
Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.
1Press the Send key.
2
Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3
Select the transmission size.
4
Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
5
Press the U or V key to select [Zoom].
Item Detail
100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)
Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified
sending size.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Sending Functions
5-7
5
6
Press the OK key. Zoom appears.
7
Press the U or V key to select [100%] or [Auto]
and then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Zoom:
a
b
*********************
2
Auto
1
*100%
Sending Functions
5-8
Duplex Sending
Select the type and binding of original depending on the original.
Part that is operated
The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.
Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Duplex].
5Press the OK key. Duplex appears.
Original Type Binding
1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided —
2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Duplex:
a
b
*********************
2
2-sided
[ Detail ]
1
*1-sided
Sending Functions
5-9
5
6Press the U or V key to select [1-sided] or [2-
sided].
If you select [2-sided], press [Detail] (the Right
Select key), select the binding edge and press the
OK key, and then select the original setting
orientation on the next screen.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Sending Functions
5-10
Original Orientation
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To
use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen.
• 1-sided / 2-sided Selection
When placing the original on the platen
When placing the original on the document processor
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation].
[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]
[Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Sending Functions
5-11
5
5Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [Top Edge Top] or
[Top Edge Left].
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Orig.Orientation:
a
b
1
c
Top Edge Top
*********************
2
*
d
Top Edge Left
Sending Functions
5-12
File Format
Select the file format of the image to send.
Part that is operated
The table below lists the file formats and their details.
NOTE: You cannot select [JPEG] if [Black and White] is selected for the color mode.
Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.
1Press the Send key.
File Format Color mode Adjustable range of image
quality
PDF Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/
B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Black and White -
PDF/A-1a Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/
B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Black and White -
PDF/A-1b Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/
B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Black and White -
TIFF Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/
B&W), Full Color, Grayscale 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Black and White -
XPS Auto(Color/Gray), Full Color,
Grayscale 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
JPEG Auto(Color/Gray), Full Color,
Grayscale 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to
5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
Sending Functions
5-13
5
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [File Format].
5Press the OK key. File Format appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the file format from
[PDF], [TIFF], [XPS] or [JPEG].
[Details] (the Right Select key) can be pressed to
select the PDF/A file format. If full color or
grayscale is selected for the scanning color mode,
press [Details] (the Right Select key) to select the
image quality.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
File Format:
a
b
*********************
2
TIFF
3
XPS
[ Detail ]
1
*PDF
Sending Functions
5-14
File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.
Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [File Separation].
5Press the OK key. File Separation appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [Each Page].
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending. The scanned originals are sent in
files of one page each.
NOTE: Three-digit serial number such as
abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of
the file name.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
File Separation:
a
b
*********************
2
Each Page
1
*Off
Sending Functions
5-15
5
Original Image
Select image quality suitable to the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.
Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Original Image].
5Press the OK key. Original Image appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the desired image
quality.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Item Detail
Text+Photo Text and photos together.
Photo For photos taken with a camera.
Text Only text, no photos.
OCR For documents to be read by OCR.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Original Image:
a
b
*********************
2
Photo
3
Text
1
*Text+Photo
Sending Functions
5-16
Adjusting Density
Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals.
Part that is operated
The table below shows the available settings.
The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Density].
5Press the OK key. Density appears.
Item Detail
Manual Adjust density using 7 levels.
Auto Optimum density is selected according to the
density of the original.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Density:
a
b
*********************
2
Manual
1
*Auto
Sending Functions
5-17
5
6Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].
If you select [Manual], press the OK key, and then
select the density on the next screen.
NOTE: When the color mode is set to full color,
automatic setting is not possible.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Sending Functions
5-18
Scan Resolution
Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes),
the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity)
and longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.
Part that is operated
The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Scan Resolution].
5Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the desired scan
resolution.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Scan Resolution:
a
b
3
200x400dpi S.Fin
*********************
5
400x400dpi U.Fin
4
*300x300dpi
Sending Functions
5-19
5
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection
This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can
select from Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/B&W), Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White.
Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection].
5Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the desired color
mode.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Color Selection:
a
b
*********************
2
Auto(Color/B&W)
3
Full Color
1
*Auto(Color/Gray)
Sending Functions
5-20
Continuous Scan
When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after
another until you press [End Scan] (the Right Select key).
The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.
1Press the Send key.
2Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan].
4Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
6Specify the destination.
7Place the original, and press the Start key.
8Place the next original, and press the Start key.
Scan the remaining originals by the same
procedure.
When you have scanned all the originals, press
[End Scan] (the Right Select key) to start sending.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Continuous Scan:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Sending Functions
5-21
5
File Name Entry
This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the
document name.
Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry].
5Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears.
6Enter the file name, press the OK key. Additional
Info. appears.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
7Enter the date, job number, etc. on the screen, and
then press the OK key.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
File Name Entry:
A
b
File_2010
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Sending Functions
5-22
Subject and Body Entry
When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail.
Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1Press the Send key.
2Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Subject/Body].
4Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears.
5Enter the subject and press the OK key.
NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the
subject.
6Enter the body and press the OK key.
NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the
body.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
7Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Subject Entry:
B
b
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Body Entry:
B
b
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Sending Functions
5-23
5
Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When scanning penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear
scanning data can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When scanning images made up of
patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of
the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen].
* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Refer to the sample image in Appendix-22.
Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Sharpness].
5Press the OK key. Sharpness appears.
6Press the U or V key to adjust the sharpness. A
larger negative value decreases the sharpness,
and a larger positive value increases the
sharpness.
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
8Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Sharpness:
a
b
*********************
2
-2
3
-1
1
*-3(Unsharpen)
Sending Functions
5-24
Background Density
Lightens the background of color originals with dark backgrounds.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Background Density Adjust is disabled
during auto color sending when the a black & white original has been detected.
Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Backgrnd Density].
5Press the OK key. Backgrnd Density appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On].
7Press the OK key. A setting menu for the density of
the ground color appears.
Original Scanning Image
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
Backgrnd Density:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Backgrnd Density:
a
b
*********************
2
2
3
3
1
1 (Lighter)
Sending Functions
5-25
5
8Press the U or V key to select the density of the
ground color. A smaller value decreases the
density of the ground color, and a larger value
increases the density.
9Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
10 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
Sending Functions
5-26
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE: For information on operating the computer, refer to the operating system help for your computer.
To use WSD Scan, WSD Scan Setup (page 8-154) must be set to [On] in the network settings.
Installing the driver
1Select Start button of the Windows display, and
then Network.
2Select the machine displayed Multifunctional
Devices, and then right-click Install.
Installing of the driver starts.
3After installing the driver, click Close.
Procedure using this machine
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book
screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
3Press the U or V key to select [WSD Scan].
4Press the OK key. WSD Scan appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [From Oper. Panel].
Send to:
a
b
2
G
Folder(SMB)
3
H
Folder(FTP)
*********************
4
P
WSD Scan
WSD Scan:
a
b
1
From Computer
*********************
[ Exit ]
2
From Oper. Panel
Sending Functions
5-27
5
6Select the destination computer from the computer
list.
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the
information of the selected computer.
7Press the OK key to confirm the destination, and
then press the Start key. Transmission starts.
NOTE: To change the destination computer, press the
Back key and then press [Yes] (the Left Select key).
This brings you back to step 6.
NOTE: To use WSD Scan from your computer, press
[From Computer] in step 5 and then scan the original
from the computer.
Select Computer:
a
b
*********************
P
Computer02
P
Computer03
[ Cancel ] [ Detail ]
P
Computer01
Press Start Key.
P
:Computer01
Sending Functions
5-28
Job Finish Notice
This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has been completed.
Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals on the platen or in the
document processor.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [JobFinish Notice].
5Press the OK key. JobFinish Notice appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
7Press the U or V key to select [Address Book] or
[Address Entry], and then press the OK key.
8If you select [Address Book], select [Address
Book] on the next screen and press the OK key,
and then select the notice destination.
Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), select
[Detail] on the next screen and press the OK key to
view the details of the selected notice destination.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
JobFinish Notice:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Destination:
a
b
*********************
2
Address Entry
1
*Address Book
Address Book:
a
b
*********************
p
Maury
p
Morgan
[ Menu ]
p
Fiala
Sending Functions
5-29
5
If you select [Address Entry], enter the address of
the notice destination.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
9Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
10
Specify the destination, and press the Start key to
start sending.
When the sending is completed, the finish notice is
sent to the specified E-mail address.
Address Entry:
A
b
******@abcdefg.jp
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Sending Functions
5-30
FTP Encrypted TX
This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select
the encryption method in the basic send screen.
Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.
1Press the Send key.
2Place the originals in the document processor or
on the platen.
3Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [FTP Encrypted
TX].
5Press the OK key. FTP Encrypted TX appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On] and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen for sending.
NOTE: Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the COMMAND CENTER. Be sure that SSL of Secure
Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings. For
details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Original Size
T
3
Original Image
T
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
g
FTP Encrypted TX:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Sending Functions
5-31
5
Scanning Image using Application
Be sure that you connect your PC with the machine using the USB cable or Network cable and install the
Kyocera TWAIN or WIA Driver. The scan can be carried out from any TWAIN or WIA compatible application
program. For details of installation for TWAIN or WIA driver, refer to Installing Printer Driver on page 2-46.
The following procedure is an example for scan operation using the TWAIN Driver. Operate the WIA Drivers in
the same manner.
1Connect the machine to a PC via a network.
NOTE: For WIA, in addition to connection via a
network, the machine can also be connected to a PC
by USB cable.
2Place the originals in the document processor or
on the platen.
3Use the TWAIN-compatible application to scan
from your computer.
NOTE: When the Login User Name and Login
Password entry screen appears, enter them and click
the OK button.
4Choose the appropriate settings and click Scan.
The scanned data will be sent to your computer.
About Color Profiles
The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color.
NOTE: The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN/WIA-compliant software. Use the color
profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN/WIA-complaint software.
Selecting a color profile compatible with this device
1Select the color profile found in the CD included
with this scanner CD (Product Library) under the
Color Profile folder.
NOTE: Use the indicated color profiles when you
chose RGB in color type.
Sending Functions
5-32
6-1
6Document Box
This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box.
• Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory................. 6-2
• Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)..... 6-5
• Removing USB Memory............................................... 6-7
• Printing from a Job Box ................................................ 6-8
Document Box
6-2
Printing Documents Stored in USB Memory
Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the
USB memory without having to use a computer.
Limitations
• The following file types can be printed:
• PDF file (Version 1.5)
• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
• XPS file
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.
• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot. We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is
error free if a USB hub is used.
Printing
Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.
1Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot.
2Press the Document Box key. The Document Box
menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory].
4Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.
5Press the U or V key to select the file you want to
print.
Document Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Polling Box
3
Job Box
1
USB Memory
USB Memory:
a
b
*********************
i
Folder-1
j
File-1
T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]
N
Store File
Document Box
6-3
6
Select a folder and press the OK key to view the
files in the folder. Documents in the top 3 folder
levels including the root directory can be viewed.
6Press [Select] (the Right Select key). The
selected file name is indicated by a checkmark
next to it.
When you want to print additional files, repeat
steps 5 to 6 to select them.
7Press the OK key. A menu appears.
8Press the U or V key to select [Print].
9Press the OK key. The basic screen appears.
Change the number of copies, 1-sided/2-sided
printing, etc., as necessary. For changing print
settings, refer to Copying on page 3-7 and
Copying Functions on page 4-1.
10
Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file
begins.
JPEG/TIFF Print
Sets the print mode for JPEG/TIFF files. The default setting is [Paper Size].
1Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6-2.
2Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [JPEG/TIFF Print].
USB Memory:
a
b
N
Store File
i
Folder-1
*********************
[ Menu ] [ Select ]
j
File-1
g
USB Memory:
a
b
*********************
2
Delete
1
Print
Ready to print.
Copies: 1
A4
q
sA
A4
a
[ Duplex ] [ Paper ]
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Paper Selection
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Collate
g
Document Box
6-4
4Press the OK key. JPEG/TIFF Print appears.
5Press the U or V key to select the desire print
mode.
The print modes are as follows:
Paper Size (scaled to fit the paper size)
Image Resolution (matched to the image
resolution)
Print Resolution (matched to the print resolution)
6Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen.
XPS FitTo Page
If you select [On] in this setting, XPS data is scaled to fit the paper size during printing. If you select [Off], the
data is printed at its original size.
1Follow steps 1 to 8 of Printing on page 6-2.
2Press the Function Menu key. Function Menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [XPS FitTo Page].
4Press the OK key. XPS FitTo Page appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
6Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the basic screen.
JPEG/TIFF Print:
a
b
*********************
2
Image Resolution
T
3
Print Resolution
T
1
*Paper Size
g
Function Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Paper Selection
T
3
Duplex
T
[ Exit ]
1
Collate
g
XPS FitTo Page:
a
b
*********************
2
On
T
T
1
*Off
g
Document Box
6-5
6
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store
files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS format.
NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100.
Storing Documents
The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.
1Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot .
2Press the Document Box key. The Document Box
menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory].
4Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Store File].
NOTE: To save the data in the folder of USB memory,
press the U or V key to select the folder, and then
press [Select] (the Right Select key). The machine will
display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including
the root folder.
Document Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Polling Box
3
Job Box
1
USB Memory
USB Memory:
a
b
*********************
i
Folder-1
j
File-1
T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]
N
Store File
Document Box
6-6
6Press the OK key. The basic screen appears.
Change the original type, file format, etc., as
necessary. For changing scan settings, refer to
Sending Functions on page 5-1.
7Press the Start key. The original is scanned and
the data is stored in the USB memory.
IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memory,
ensure that you use the correct removal procedure, as
described in Removing USB Memory on page 6-7.
Ready to scan.
A4
q
1-sided 300x300dpi
[2-sided ] [ScanRes.]
Document Box
6-7
6
Removing USB Memory
Remove the USB memory.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
1Press the Document Box key. The Document Box
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory].
3Press the OK key. USB Memory appears.
4Press [Menu] (the Left Select key). A menu
appears.
NOTE: This is the image on the screen when a folder
is selected. [Open] is not displayed when a file is
selected.
5Press the U or V key to select [Remove Memory].
6Press the OK key. A confirmation message
appears.
7Press [OK] (the Right Select key) or remove the
USB memory. The screen returns to the Document
Box menu.
Document Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Polling Box
3
Job Box
1
USB Memory
USB Memory:
a
b
*********************
i
Folder-1
j
File-1
T
[ Menu ] [ Select ]
N
Store File
Menu(Folder):
a
b
1
Memory Detail
2
Remove Memory
USB memory can be
safely removed.
[OK ]
Document Box
6-8
Printing from a Job Box
When optional memory is installed and RAM Disk Mode is enabled, you can use a Job Box to print.
Job Box is a function that stores print data on the set RAM disk in the machine, enabling the data to be printed
as needed from the operation panel of the machine.
If an ID (4-digit number) is set when printing is executed from the computer, the data can be kept more
confidential. When an ID is set, the ID must be entered in order to print the stored data from the machine.
For the RAM disk settings, see RAM Disk Mode on page 8-60.
Private Print
Private Print is used to allow printing only after the same 4-digit ID that was entered in the printer driver at the
time of printing is entered at the operation panel. The data is erased after printing. Store job mode stores the
print data on the RAM disk after printing. An ID is not entered in the printer driver.
For information on Private Print and store job mode, see Help in the printer driver.
The procedure for printing stored data is explained below.
1Press the Document Box key. The Document Box
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Job Box].
3Press the OK key. The Job Box menu appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Private].
5Press the OK key. The user selection menu
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the user.
Document Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Polling Box
3
Job Box
1
USB Memory
Job Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Quick Copy
1
Private
Private:
a
b
*********************
l
Maury
l
Fiala
Document Box
6-9
6
7Press the OK key. The print file selection menu
appears.
8Press the U or V key to select the file to be
printed, and then press [Select] (the Right Select
key). The selected file will be marked.
If you need to add another file, repeat this
procedure to select the file.
NOTE: To select all files, press Menu (the Left Select
key) and select [Select All]. To deselect all files, select
[Clear All]. To show file details, select [Detail].
9Press the OK key. The file print and delete
selection menu appears.
10 Press the U or V key to select [Print] and press
the OK key.
NOTE: To delete the selected file without printing it,
select [Delete] and press the OK key. The file deletion
confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left
Select key). Completed. appears and the file is
deleted.
11 If a file is selected for which an ID was set at the
time of printing, the ID entry screen appears. Enter
the ID and press the OK key.
If an ID is not set, go to step 12.
l
Fiala
:
a
b
*********************
o
Data02
o
Data03
[ Menu ] [ Select ]
o
Data01
Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Clear All
3
Detail
1
Select All
Fiala:
a
b
*********************
2
Delete
1
Print
Fiala:
b
*********************
1216
S
Document Box
6-10
12 The number of copies screen appears. Set the
number of copies and press the OK key.
13
The file print confirmation screen appears. Press
[Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted appears and
printing begins.
Quick Copy mode
This mode is used to print an additional copy of a document that has already been printed. If a document is
printed with Quick Copy selected in the printer driver, the document will be simultaneously stored on the RAM
disk. The required number of copies can be printed whenever needed from the operation panel. If more
documents than the set maximum are stored, the oldest job will be overwritten each time a new job is stored.
When the machine power is turned off, jobs stored in this mode are erased. For the number of documents that
can be stored in Quick Copy mode, see Quick Copy Jobs on page 8-76.
1Press the Document Box key. The Document Box
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Job Box].
3Press the OK key. The Job Box menu appears.
4Press theU or V key to select [Quick Copy].
5Press the OK key. The user selection menu
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the user.
Copies:
a
b
(1 - 999,---)
********
copies
---
Document Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Polling Box
3
Job Box
1
USB Memory
Job Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Quick Copy
1
Private
Quick Copy:
a
b
*********************
l
Maury
l
Fiala
Document Box
6-11
6
7Press the OK key. The print file selection menu
appears.
8Press the U or V key to select the file to be
printed, and then press [Select] (the Right Select
key). The selected file will be marked.
If you need to add another file, repeat this
procedure to select the file.
NOTE: To select all files, press Menu (the Left Select
key) and select [Select All]. To deselect all files, select
[Clear All]. To show file details, select [Detail].
9Press the OK key. The file print and delete
selection menu appears.
10 Press the U or V key to select [Print] and press
the OK key.
NOTE: To delete the selected file without printing it,
select [Delete] and press the OK key. The file deletion
confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left
Select key). Completed. appears and the file is
deleted.
11 The number of copies screen appears. Set the
number of copies and press the OK key.
12
The file print confirmation screen appears. Press
[Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted appears and
printing begins.
l
Fiala
:
a
b
*********************
o
Data02
o
Data03
[ Menu ] [ Select ]
o
Data01
Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Clear All
3
Detail
1
Select All
Fiala:
a
b
*********************
2
Delete
1
Print
Copies:
a
b
(1 - 999,---)
********
copies
---
Document Box
6-12
7-1
7 Status / Job Cancel
This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being
processed or waiting to be printed.
• Checking Job Status.....................................................7-2
• Checking Job History.................................................... 7-8
• Sending the Job Log History ...................................... 7-13
• Pause and Resumption of Jobs.................................. 7-18
• Canceling of Jobs....................................................... 7-18
• Device/Communication...............................................7-19
Status / Job Cancel
7-2
Checking Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the Message Display in four different
screens - Print Job, Send Job, Store Job, and Scheduled Job. The following job statuses are available.
Print Job Status Screen
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Status].
3Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears. Press
the U or V key to check the print queue.
Screen Job statuses to be displayed
Print Job • Copy
• Printer
• FAX reception
• Document Box
• E-mail reception
• Job Report /List
• Printing data from removable memory
Send Job • FAX transmission
• PC (SMB/FTP) transmission
•E-mail
• Application
• Multiple destination
• Sending Job FAX using Delayed
transmission
Store Job • Scan
•FAX
Scheduled Job • FAX
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Print Job Status:
a
b
0008
r
Copy
r
0009
r
maury’s data
0010
W
aaaa
[ Pause ] [ Menu ]
123 4
Status / Job Cancel
7-3
7
Press the OK key to check detailed information of
the selected job.
NOTE: You can also check the job information by
pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting
[Detail] in the menu that appears.
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other
information items. The items displayed are as
follows:
Status (status of job)
Accepted Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Page and Copy
(number of pages and copies to be printed)
Original Page (number of pages of the original)
Color Mode
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information
When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the
complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen.
0009 Detail:
C
b
Status: 1/9
Processing
No. Item / Key Detail
1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job
2 Type Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job r
Printer job W
FAX reception b
E-mail reception p
Job from Document Box x
Report / List j
Data from Removable Memory Y
3 Job Name Job Name or file name
Status / Job Cancel
7-4
Send Job Status screen
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Send Job Status].
3Press the OK key. Send Job Status appears. Press
the U or V key to check the send queue.
Press the OK key to check detailed information of
the selected job.
NOTE: You can also check the job information by
pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting
[Detail] in the menu that appears.
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other
information items. The items displayed are as
follows:
Status (status of job)
Accepted Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)
Destination
4 Status Status of job
r :Printing
s : Print Waiting
no icon: Pausing print job or error
R : Preferential print job is
running
S : Suspended because
preferential print job is
running
No. Item / Key Detail
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Send Job Status:
a
b
0010
b
066764333
r
0011
p
Broadcast
N
0017
b
0324256345
N
[ Cancel ] [ Menu ]
123 4
0011 Detail:
C
b
Status: 1/8
Processing
Status / Job Cancel
7-5
7
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to
the original screen.
When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information
When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete
destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the
destination list. Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the
complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list.
Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original
screen.
The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen.
No. Item / Key Detail
1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job
2 Type Icons that indicate the job type
Sending Job FAX b
Sending Job PC (SMB/FTP)
Sending Job E-mail p
Sending Job TWAIN2/WSD Scan P
When broadcast sending is done,
Broadcast is displayed next to the
icon. When TWAIN send or WSD
send is executed, "Application"
appears next to the icon.
3 Destination Destination (Either destination name,
FAX number, E-mail address, or
server name)
4 Status Status of job
r : Sending
no icon: Sending Waiting
s : Pausing the job
X: Stop sending
Status / Job Cancel
7-6
Store Job Status screen
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Store Job Status].
3Press the OK key. Store Job Status appears. Press
the U or V key to check the store queue.
Press the OK key to check detailed information of
the selected job.
NOTE: You can also check the job information by
pressing [Menu] (the Right Select key) and selecting
[Detail] in the menu that appears.
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other
information items. The items displayed are as
follows:
Status (status of job)
Accepted Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)
Sender Info. (destination information)
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Store Job Status:
a
b
0008
N
Scan
r
0009
b
maury’s data
0010
b
aaaa
[ Cancel ] [ Menu ]
123 4
0009 Detail:
C
b
Status: 1/8
Processing
Status / Job Cancel
7-7
7
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to
the original screen.
When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK
key to return to the original screen.
The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.
No. Display / Key Details
1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job
2 Type Icons that indicate the job type
Storing Job Scan N
Storing Job FAX b
3 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.
4 Status Status of job
s : Storing Data
no icon: Storing Waiting
Status / Job Cancel
7-8
Checking Job History
Check the history of completed jobs.
NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KMnet Viewer from the computer. For details,
refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide or KMnet Viewer User Guide.
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Print Jobs, Send Jobs, Store Jobs, and Scheduled
Jobs. The following job histories are available.
Displaying Print Job Log
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Log].
Screen Job histories to be displayed
Print Job • Copy
• Printer
• FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from a Document Box
• Job Report / List
• Printing data from removable
memory
Send Job • FAX
• PC (SMB/FTP)
• E-mail
• Application
• Multiple destination
Store Job • Scan
•FAX
Scheduled Job • FAX
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Status / Job Cancel
7-9
7
3Press the OK key. Print Job Log appears. Press
the U or V key to check the print log.
A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right
of each job.
u : Job completed normally
v : Job error
t : Job aborted
NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Print Job
Status Screen on page 7-2.
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key)
to check the detailed information of the selected
print log.
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other
information items. The items displayed are as
follows:
Result
Accepted Time
End Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Page and Copy
(number of pages and copies to be printed)
Original Page (number of pages of the original)
Color Mode
Sender Info. (destination information)
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information
When the job name in Job Name is displayed in a short form, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) to see the
complete job name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK
key to return to the original screen.
Print Job Log:
a
b
0006
r
maury’s da.
v
0007
r
tom’s da.
u
0008
r
susan’s da.
u
[ Detail ]
0006 Detail:
C
b
Result: 1/9
Error
00100
Status / Job Cancel
7-10
Displaying Send Job Log
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Send Job Log].
3Press the OK key. Send Job Log appears. Press
the U or V key to check the send log.
A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right
of each job.
u : Job completed normally
v : Job error
t : Job aborted
NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Send Job
Status screen on page 7-4.
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key)
to check the detailed information of the selected
send log.
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other
information items. The items displayed are as
follows:
Result
Accepted Time
End Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)
Destination
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Send Job Log:
a
b
0004
p
Broadcast
u
0003
b
0756545865
u
0002
p
Morgan@kyoc
N
v
[ Detail ]
0004 Detail:
C
b
Result: 1/9
OK
Status / Job Cancel
7-11
7
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to
the original screen.
When complete destination name not displayed in detailed information
When there is only one destination, press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Destination to see the complete
destination name. Press the OK key to return to the original screen.
When there are two or more destinations, press [List] (the Right Select key) in Destination to display the
destination list. Press the U or V key to select the desired destination and press the OK key. This displays the
complete name of the destination. Press the OK key to return to the destination list.
Pressing [Exit] (the Right Select key) while the destination list is displayed brings you back to the original
screen.
Displaying Store Job Log
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Store Job Log].
3Press the OK key. Store Job Log appears. Press
the U or V key to check the store queue.
A job result icon is displayed on the extreme right
of each job.
u : Job completed normally
v : Job error
t : Job aborted
NOTE: For details of other items, refer to Store Job
Status screen on page 7-6.
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Store Job Log:
a
b
0008
b
Scan
u
0009
b
maury’s data
v
0010
Y
aaaa
v
[ Detail ]
Status / Job Cancel
7-12
Press the OK key or [Detail] (the Right Select key)
to check the detailed information of the selected
job.
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other
information items. The items displayed are as
follows:
Result
Accepted Time
End Time
Job Name
Job Type
User Name
Original Pages (number of pages of the original)
Color/B & W (color mode of the original)
Sender Info. (destination information)
When complete job name not displayed in detailed information
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Job Name to see the complete job name. Press the OK key to return to
the original screen.
When complete destination information not displayed in detailed information
Press [Detail] (the Right Select key) in Sender Info. to see the complete destination information. Press the OK
key to return to the original screen.
0009 Detail:
C
b
Result: 1/9
Error
10200
Status / Job Cancel
7-13
7
Sending the Job Log History
You can send the job log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent
automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Displaying Job Log History Menu
1Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel. The Sys. Menu/Count. menu
appears.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
2In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Report].
3Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.
IMPORTANT: When a time period to prohibit
acceptance of jobs is set in timer settings, the screen
will display Now, the machine is prohibited to be used.
and return to the standby screen.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
2
Counter
3
System
[ Exit ]
1
Report
Login User Name:
L
b
********************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
2
Counter
3
System
[ Exit ]
1
Report
Report:
a
b
*********************
2
Admin Rpt Set.
3
Result Rpt Set.
[ Exit ]
1
Report Print
Now, the machine is
prohibited to be
used.
23:00 - 08:30
Status / Job Cancel
7-14
4Press the U or V key to select [Job Log History].
5Press the OK key. The Job Log History menu
appears.
Setting the destination
Set the destination to which job log histories are sent.
Use the procedure below to set the destination.
1In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key
to select [Destination].
2Press the OK key. The Destination menu appears.
Confirming Current Destination
1In the Destination menu, press the U or V key to
select [Confirmation].
Report:
a
b
2
Admin Rpt Set.
3
Result Rpt Set.
*********************
[ Exit ]
4
Job Log History
Job Log History:
a
b
*********************
2
Send History
3
Destination
[ Exit ]
1
Auto Sending
Job Log History:
a
b
1
Auto Sending
2
Send History
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
Destination
Destination:
a
b
*********************
2
Register
[ Exit ]
1
Confirmation
Destination:
a
b
*********************
2
Register
[ Exit ]
1
Confirmation
Status / Job Cancel
7-15
7
2Press the OK key. Dest. Confirm. appears.
NOTE: Press the OK key to edit/delete the current
destination. Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
3Press [Exit] (the Right Select key). The basic
screen reappears.
Registering Destination
1In the Destination menu, press the U or V key to
select [Register].
2Press the OK key. Register appears.
To select a destination from the address book,
press the U or V key to select [Address Book] and
then press the OK key. This displays the address
book. Select your desired destination.
NOTE: For selecting a destination from the address
book, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-44.
To directly enter a destination, press the U or V
key to select [Address Entry] and then press the
OK key. This displays an entry screen. Enter the
destination address directly.
3Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Destination menu.
Dest. Confirm.:
a
b
****************
*
****
N
[ Exit ]
p
Morgan@kyoceramita
Destination:
a
b
1
Confirmation
*********************
[ Exit ]
2
Register
Register:
a
b
*********************
2
Address Entry
1
Address Book
Completed.
Status / Job Cancel
7-16
NOTE: If the address of the selected destination has
been changed after you selected the destination from
the address book, [*] is displayed before [Address
Entry]. Refer to Confirming Current Destination on
page 7-14 and reconfirm the destination address.
Automatic Job Log History Transmission
This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs
has been logged.
Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission.
1In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key
to select [Auto Sending].
2Press the OK key. Auto Sending appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
If you select [On] and press the OK key, Jobs
appears. Use the numeric keys to enter the
number of jobs to be sent at a time.
4Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Job Log History menu.
Manual Job Log History Transmission
You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually.
Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually.
Register:
a
b
*********************
2
*Address Entry
1
Address Book
Job Log History:
a
b
*********************
2
Send History
3
Destination
[ Exit ]
1
Auto Sending
Auto Sending:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Jobs:
D
b
(1 - 16)
******16*
jobs
Status / Job Cancel
7-17
7
1In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key
to select [Send History].
2Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
IMPORTANT: If no destination is registered, Enter
destination is displayed. Refer to Registering
Destination on page 7-15 and register the desired
destination
3Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Accepted. is
displayed and the job log is sent to the registered
destination before the screen returns to the Job
Log History menu.
Setting E-mail Subject
Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e-mail.
Use the procedure below to set the subject.
1In the Job Log History menu, press the U or V key
to select [Subject].
2Press the OK key. Subject appears.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
3Enter the destination address.
4Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Job Log History menu.
Job Log History:
a
b
1
Auto Sending
*********************
3
Destination
[ Exit ]
2
Send History
Send the job log
history.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Enter destination.
Job Log History:
a
b
2
Send History
3
Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
4
Subject
Subject:
B
b
%printer
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Status / Job Cancel
7-18
Pause and Resumption of Jobs
Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Print Job Status].
3Press the OK key. Print Job Status appears.
4Press [Pause] (the Left Select key). Printing is
paused.
When you press [Resume] (the Left Select key) to
resume printing.
NOTE: When you press the Back key, a confirmation
screen appears. Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to
resume printing.
Canceling of Jobs
For canceling jobs, refer to Canceling Jobs on page 3-50.
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Print Job Status:
a
b
*********************
0009
r
maury’s data
0010
y
aaaa
[ Pause ] [ Menu ]
0008
r
Copy
r
Pausing:
a
b
*********************
0009
r
maury’s data
s
0010
y
aaaa
s
[ Resume ] [ Menu ]
0008
r
Copy
s
Resume paused jobs.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Status / Job Cancel
7-19
7
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control
devices depending on their status.
Check of Device Status
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [Scanner], [Printer]
or [FAX].
3Press the OK key. This displays the status of the
device selected in step 2.
4Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status
menu.
The items you can check are described below.
Scanner
The information (scanning, pausing, etc.) is displayed.
Printer
Information (waiting, printing, etc.) is displayed.
Status:
a
b
7
Store Job Log
*********************
9
Printer
[ Pause ]
8
Scanner
Scanner:
b
Ready.
Printer:
b
Ready.
FAX:
b
Ready.
[ Log ]
Status / Job Cancel
7-20
FAX
The information (sending, waiting, etc.) is displayed.
If you press [Log] (the Right Select key), the Log
menu appears. From this screen, you can check or
print the transmission/reception history.
NOTE: If you are using a user management function,
the menu for printing the transmission/reception
history appears only when you have logged in as an
administrator.
Handling the Devices
USB memory
The status of the USB memory that is connected to the machine appears. This is also used when removing the
USB memory from the machine.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [USB Memory].
3Press the OK key. This displays the status of the
USB memory.
Press the Y or Z key to switch the display to other
information items. The items displayed are as
follows:
Capacity
Used Area
Free Space
Log:
a
b
*********************
2
Incoming FAX Log
3
Outgoing FAX Rpt
1
Outgoing FAX Log
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Status:
a
b
<
Paper Status
*********************
>
USB Keyboard
[ Pause ]
=
USB Memory
USB Memory:
C
b
Capacity: 1/3
512.0MB
[ Remove ]
Status / Job Cancel
7-21
7
When you press [Remove] (the Left Select key), a
confirmation screen appears and you can remove
the USB memory.
4Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The screen
returns to the Status menu.
USB keyboard
This appears when a USB keyboard is connected to the machine, and indicates whether the keyboard can be
used.
1Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status
menu appears.
2Press the U or V key to select [USB Keyboard].
3Press the OK key. Indicates whether the USB
keyboard can be used.
4Press the OK key. The screen returns to the Status
menu.
USB memory can be
safely removed.
[OK ]
Status:
a
b
*********************
2
Send Job Status
3
Store Job Status
[ Pause ]
1
Print Job Status
Status:
a
b
<
Memory Card
=
USB Memory
*********************
[ Pause ]
>
USB Keyboard
USB Keyboard:
C
b
Available
Status / Job Cancel
7-22
8-1
8 Default Setting (System Menu)
This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on
the operation panel.
• Common Settings......................................................... 8-2
• Copy Settings .............................................................8-62
• Sending Settings ........................................................8-70
• Document Box Settings.............................................. 8-74
• Printer Settings........................................................... 8-79
• Printing Reports/Sending Notice ................................ 8-95
• Adjustment/Maintenance..........................................8-101
• Date/Timer................................................................ 8-117
•
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys)
8-133
• Restarting the System .............................................. 8-148
• Network Setup.......................................................... 8-149
• Network Security ......................................................8-160
• Interface Block Setting.............................................. 8-168
• Security Level (Security Level setting) ..................... 8-173
• Optional Functions....................................................8-174
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-2
Common Settings
Common settings include;
• How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu …8-2
• Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-3
• Default Screen …8-5
• Sound …8-6
• Display Bright. …8-7
• Original/Paper Settings …8-8
• Switching Unit of Measurement …8-26
• Error Handling …8-27
• Function Defaults …8-29
• Login Operation …8-58
• Optional Memory …8-59
• RAM Disk Mode …8-60
How to display the Sys. Menu/Count. menu
1Press the System Menu/Counter key on the main
unit operation panel.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
2The Sys. Menu/Count. menu appears.
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
2
Counter
3
System
[ Exit ]
1
Report
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-3
8
Switching the Language for Display [Language]
You can select the language of the message display by following the procedure given below. You can optionally
download messages in other languages. Contact your service technician for information.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Language].
4Press the OK key. The Language menu appears.
The available languages are as follows:
English
Deutsch
Français
Español
Italiano
Nederlands
Português
The optional languages are as follows:
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Language:
a
b
*********************
2
Deutsch
3
Français
1
*English
Optional language Message display
Turkish Türkçe
Greek Ελληνικά
Polish Polski
Czech
Hungarian Magyar
Finnish Suomi
Hebrew
Arabic
Русский
Èeský
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-4
If you are using one of the optional languages, it is
displayed in place of Portugues.
5Press the U or V key to select a language.
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
Swedish Svensk
Danish Dansk
Norwegian Norsk
Romanian
Korean
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Optional language Message display
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-5
8
Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows.
The table below lists the available screens.
Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Default Screen].
4Press the OK key. Default Screen appears.
5Press the U or V key to select the default screen.
Item Description
Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown
when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed)
appears.
Copy The Copy screen (the screen shown when the
Copy key is pressed) appears.
Send The Send screen (the screen shown when the
Send key is pressed) appears.
FAX The FAX screen (the screen shown when the
FAX key is pressed) appears.
Document Box The Document Box screen (the screen shown
when the Document Box key is pressed)
appears.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
1
Language
*********************
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
2
Default Screen
Default Screen:
a
b
1
Status
*********************
3
Send
2
*Copy
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-6
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. The asterisk in the table is a default setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Sound].
4Press the OK key. Sound appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Buzzer].
Item Value Description
Key
Confirmation Off, On * Emit a sound when the
control panel are pressed.
Job Finish Off*, On Emit a sound when a print
job is normally completed.
Ready Off*, On Emit a sound when the
warm-up is completed.
Warning Off, On* Emit a sound when errors
occur.
Keyboard
Confirm Off*, On This sounds when the USB
keyboard is used.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
1
Language
2
Default Screen
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
Sound
Sound:
a
b
*********************
2
FAX Speaker
3
FAX Monitor
[ Exit ]
1
Buzzer
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-7
8
6Press the OK key. Buzzer appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Key Confirmation].
8Press the OK key. Key Confirmation appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Buzzer menu.
Display Bright.
Set the brightness of the display.
Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Display Bright.].
4Press the OK key. Display Bright. appears.
Buzzer:
a
b
*********************
2
Job finish
3
Ready
[ Exit ]
1
Key Confirmation
Key Confirmation:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Display Bright.
:
a
b
3
Darker -1
*********************
5
Lighter+1
4
*Normal 0
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-8
5Press the U or V key to select the display
brightness from [Darker -3] to [Lighter +3].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
Original/Paper Settings
Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.
Custom Original Size Setup
Set up frequently-used custom original size. The dimensions available are as follows.
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Custom Orig.Size].
Input units Dimensions
Inch models X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-9
8
6Press the OK key. Size Entry(Y) appears.
7Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y).
8Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears.
9Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X).
10
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.
Size Entry(Y):
D
b
(1.97 - 8.50)
x
***7.00*
"
Size Entry(X):
D
b
(1.97 - 14.02)
J
**11.23*
"
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-10
Default Original Size Setup
In the screen for setting the paper size for the paper feed cassette or multi purpose tray, select the paper size
to be used as the default value.
Use the procedure below to select the paper size to be used as the default value.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Def. Orig. Size].
6Press the OK key. Def. Orig. Size appears.
7Press the U or V key to select the paper size to be
used as the default value.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
Def. Orig. Size:
a
b
*********************
2
Legal
q
3
Statement
q
1
*Letter
q
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-11
8
Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print
Set up a frequently-used custom paper size. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select
paper.
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Custom paper sizes can be added for each paper source.
Select media type for each paper size.
Media type: Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Rough, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8
NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 for Custom 1-8 for media type.
Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
Input units Dimensions
Inch models Cassette: X: 4.13 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Paper Feeder: X: 5.83 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 8.27 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
MP Tray: X: 2.75 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models Cassette: X: 105 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)
Paper Feeder: X: 148 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 210 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)
MP Tray: X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-12
3Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Custom
PaperSize].
6Press the OK key. The Custom PaperSize menu
appears.
7Select the paper source in which you want to set
the custom size and press the OK key. Size
Entry(Y) appears.
8Use the numeric keys to enter the paper length (Y).
9Press the OK key. Size Entry(X) appears.
10
Use the numeric keys to enter the paper width (X).
11
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
Custom PaperSize
a
b
*********************
2
Cassette 2 Size
3
Cassette 3 Size
1
Cassette 1 Size
Size Entry(Y):
D
b
(5.83 - 14.02)
x
***14.02*
"
Size Entry(X):
D
b
(4.13 - 8.50)
J
***8.50*
"
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-13
8
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes
Select the size and type of paper used when cassette 1 and the optional paper feeder (cassettes 2 and 3) are
used. A paper size setting can be specified for a cassette when the Paper Size Dial is set to "Other".
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Set.],
[Cassette 2 Set.] or [Cassette 3 Set.].
Item Description
Paper Size Letter, Legal, Statement*, Executive, Oficio II,
A4, A5, A6*, B5, Folio, 16K, Envelope C5,
Custom
* Cassette 1 only
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough, Recycled,
Preprint***, Bond**, Color, Prepunched***,
Letterhead***, Thick (163 g/m2 or less), High
Quality, Custom 1-8**
** To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper
Weight on page 8-17.
*** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to
Special Paper Action on page 8-23.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound [ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-14
Follow the steps below when you select the main
unit cassette ([Cassette 1]). Operate in a similar
fashion when you select an optional cassette
([Cassette 2 or 3])
6The Cassette 1 Set. menu appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Size].
NOTE: This item does not appear when the Paper
Size Dial on the cassette is set to other than "Other".
8Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Size appears.
9Press the U or V key to select the paper size.
10
Press the OK key. The screen returns to the
Cassette 1 Set. menu.
11
Press the U or V key to select [Cassette 1 Type].
12
Press the OK key. Cassette 1 Type appears.
13
Press the U or V key to select the paper type.
14
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Cassette 1 Set. menu.
Cassette 1 Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Cassette 1 Type
[ Exit ]
1
Cassette 1 Size
Cassette 1 Size:
a
b
*********************
2
Legal
a
3
Statement
a
1
*Letter
a
Cassette 1 Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Cassette 1 Type
[ Exit ]
1
Cassette 1 Size
Cassette 1 Type:
a
b
*********************
2
Rough
3
Recycled
1
*Plain
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-15
8
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray
Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
Item Description
Paper
Size Standard
Sizes Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II,
A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 16K, ISO B5,
Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom*
* Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on
page 8-11 for selecting Custom Paper Size.
Size
Entry Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Inch models:
X: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models:
X: 70 to 216 (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 148 to 356 (in 1 mm increments)
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough,
Vellum (63 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted**, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more), Coated, High
Quality, Custom 1-8**
** Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-17 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from
Media Type.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to
Special Paper Action on page 8-23.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-16
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Set.].
6Press the OK key. The MP Tray Set. menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Size].
8Press the OK key. MP Tray Size appears.
9Press the U or V key to select the paper size.
10
Press the OK key. The screen returns to the MP
Tray Set. menu.
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
MP Tray Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
MP Tray Type
[ Exit ]
1
MP Tray Size
MP Tray Size:
a
b
<
16K
a
=
ISO B5
*********************
>
*Envelope #10
MP Tray Size:
a
b
<
16K
a
=
ISO B5
*********************
>
*Envelope #10
MP Tray Set.:
a
b
1
MP Tray Size
*********************
[ Exit ]
2
MP Tray Type
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-17
8
11
Press the U or V key to select [MP Tray Type].
12
Press the OK key. MP Tray Type appears.
13
Press the U or V key to select the paper type.
14
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the MP Tray Set. menu.
Paper Weight
Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows.
Paper types and weights
z: Default value c: Available X: Not available
MP Tray Type:
a
b
*********************
2
Transparency
3
Rough
1
*Plain
Paper
Weight Light Normal
1Normal
2Normal
3Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Extra
Heavy Duplex
Weight (g/m2),
Media type 60g/m2
to
63g/m2
60g/m2
to
74g/m2
75g/m2
to
90g/m2
91g/m2
to
105g/m2
106g/m2
to
135g/m2
136g/m2
to
163g/m2
164g/m2
to
220g/m2
Trans-
parency
Plain cczcccccc
Transparency
ccccccczX
Vellum zccccccc X
Labels cccczccc X
Recycled cczcccccc
Preprinted cc zcccccc
Bond ccczccccc
Cardstock cccczccc X
Color cczcccccc
Prepunched cczcccccc
Rough ccczccccc
Letterhead cc zcccccc
Coated cccczcccc
Thick ccccczccc
Envelope ccccczcc X
High Quality ccczccccc
Custom 1-8 cczccccc
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-18
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Media Type Set.].
6Press the OK key. Media Type Set. menu appears.
7Press the U or V key to select the paper type for
which you want to make settings.
Item Description
Duplex Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.
Permit Duplex printing allowed.
Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names
should be not more than 16 characters.
Selecting media type at multi purpose tray,
the name after change will be displayed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
Media type Set.:
K
b
*********************
2
Transparency
3
Rough
[ Exit ]
1
Plain
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-19
8
8Press the OK key. The menu for the selected
paper type appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [Paper Weight].
10
Press the OK key. The Paper Weight menu
appears.
11
Press the U or V key to select the weight of paper.
12
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the menu for the selected paper
type.
When the selected paper type is [Custom 1 to 8],
you can further set whether to enable or disable
duplex and the name of the custom paper type.
13
Press the U or V key to select [Duplex].
14
Press the OK key. The Duplex menu appears.
15
Press the U or V key to select whether to enable
or disable duplex.
Plain:
a
b
*********************
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Weight
Paper Weight:
a
b
*********************
2
*Heavy 3
3
Heavy 2
1
Extra Heavy
Plain:
a
b
*********************
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Weight
Custom 1:
a
b
*********************
2
Duplex
3
Name
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Weight
Duplex:
a
b
*********************
2
Prohibit
[ Exit ]
1
Permit
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-20
16
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the menu for the selected custom
paper type.
17
Press the U or V key to select [Name].
18
Press the OK key. Name Entry is displayed.
Enter the name of the custom paper type.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
19
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the menu for the selected custom
paper type.
Custom 1:
a
b
*********************
2
Duplex
3
Name
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Weight
Name Entry:
C
b
Osaka SD Kyocer
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Custom 1:
a
b
*********************
2
Duplex
3
Name
[ Exit ]
1
Paper Weight
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-21
8
Default Paper Source
Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and Multi Purpose Tray.
NOTE: [Cassette 2] and [Cassette 3] are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Def.
PaperSource].
6Press the OK key. Def. PaperSource appears.
7Press the U or V key to select the paper source to
be used preferentially.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the menu for the selected custom
paper type.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
Def. PaperSurce:
a
b
*********************
2
Cassette 2
3
Cassette 3
1
*Cassette 1
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-22
Media for Auto Selection
When [Auto] is selected in Paper Selection, the paper source that is automatically selected can be limited by
media types.If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select
[All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Media for Auto].
6Press the OK key. The color selection menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Full Color] or
[Black & White].
8Press the OK key. Media for Auto appears.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
Media for Auto:
a
b
*********************
2
Black & White
1
Full Color
Media for Auto:
a
b
1
All Media Type
*********************
3
Transparency
2
*Plain
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-23
8
9Press the U or V key to select [All Media Type] or
the paper type to be used for paper selection.
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.
Special Paper Action
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction
might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a
case, select [Adj. PrintDirect] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed
Priority].
The table below lists the available settings and their details.
If you select [Adj. PrintDirect], load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is
supposed to be done, upward.
Item Description
Adj. PrintDirect Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little
slower. Select this item to print on
Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.
Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and
disregard the paper orientation. Select this
item when paper orientation is not
important.
Original
Original
Finished
Finished
Cassette
Cassette Multi Purpose Tray
Multi Purpose TrayPaper
Paper
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-24
Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Orig./Paper Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Orig./Paper Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [SpcialPaper Act.].
6Press the OK key. SpcialPaper Act. appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Adj. PrintDirect] or
[Speed Priority].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Orig./Paper Set. menu.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Orig./Paper Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. Orig. Size
3
Custom PaperSize
[ Exit ]
1
Custom Orig.Size
SpcialPaper Act.:
a
b
*********************
2
Speed Priority
1
*Adj. PrintDirect
SpcialPaper Act.:
a
b
1
Adj. PrintDirect
*********************
2
*Speed Priority
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-25
8
Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies.
Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Preset Limit].
4Press the OK key. The Preset Limit menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to enter the number of
copies.
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Preset Limit:
D
b
(1 - 999)
**999*
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-26
Switching Unit of Measurement
Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Use the procedure below to change the input units.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Measurement].
4Press the OK key. The Measurement menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [inch] or [mm].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Measurement:
a
b
*********************
2
mm
1
*inch
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-27
8
Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for
the errors are as follows.
Duplexing Error
Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type.
Paper Mismatch Error
Select the method to handle if the selected paper size or paper type does not match the paper size or paper
type set in the paper source when printing from your computer.
Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Error Handling].
Item Description
1-sided Printed in 1-sided
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is
displayed.
Item Description
Ignore Printing continues.
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is
displayed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-28
4Press the OK key. The Error Handling menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select
[DuplexPaperError].
6Press the OK key. DuplexPaperError appears.
7Press the U or V key to select the method to
handle if duplex is disabled.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Error Handling menu.
9Press the U or V key to select
[PagerMismatchErr].
10
Press the OK key. PagerMismatchErr appears.
11
Press the U or V key to select the method to
handle paper mismatch.
12
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Error Handling menu.
Error Handling:
a
b
*********************
2
PaperMismatchErr
[ Exit ]
1
DuplexPaperError
DuplexPaperError:
a
b
1
1-sided
*********************
2
*Display Error
Error Handling:
a
b
1
DuplexPaperError
*********************
[ Exit ]
2
PaperMismatchErr
PaperMismatchErr:
a
b
1
Ignore
*********************
2
*Display Error
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-29
8
Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed.
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as
defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.
Orig.Orientation
Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below.
Refer to page 4-8 for Original Orientation.
Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Orig.Orientation].
Item Description
c Top Edge Top Select the original's top edge at the top.
d Top Edge Left Select the original's top edge at the left.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-30
6Press the OK key. Orig.Orientation appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [c Top Edge Top]
or [d Top Edge Left] .
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Continuous Scan
Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below.
Refer to page 4-14 for Continuous Scan.
Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
Orig.Orientation:
a
b
1
c
Top Edge Top
*********************
2
*
d
Top Edge Left
Item Description
Off Continuous scan not performed
On Continuous scan performed
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-31
8
5Press the U or V key to select [Continuous Scan].
6Press the OK key. Continuous Scan appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Original Image
Set the default original document type. The available default settings are shown below.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
Continuous Scan:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Item Description
Text+Photo Text and photos together.
Photo For photos taken with a camera.
Text Only text, no photos.
Map For maps, etc.
Printed Document For documents printed from this machine.
for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-32
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Original Image].
6Press the OK key. Original Image appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Text+Photo],
[Photo], [Text] or [for OCR].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Scan Resolution
Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi U.Fin (Ultra Fine), 300x300dpi,
200x400dpi S.Fin (Super Fine), 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Norm. (Normal).
Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Original Image:
a
b
*********************
2
Photo
3
Text
1
*Text+Photo
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-33
8
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Scan Resolution].
6Press the OK key. Scan Resolution appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [200x100dpi
Norm.], [200x200dpi Fine], [200x400dpi S.Fin],
[300x300dpi], [400x400dpi U.Fin] or [600x600dpi].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Color Selection
Select the default color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below.
<Copy>
<FAX/Scan>
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Scan Resolution:
a
b
*********************
2
200x200dpi Fine
3
200x400dpi S.Fin
1
200x100dpi Norm.
Color mode Description
Auto Color Automatically recognize whether
documents are color or black and white.
Full Color Scan document in full color.
Black & White Scan document in black and white.
Color mode Description
Auto(Color/Gray) Color and black & white originals are
automatically detected. Color originals are
scanned in full color, and black & white
originals are scanned in shades of black &
white.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-34
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Color Selection].
6Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
Auto(Color/B&W) Color and black & white originals are
automatically detected. Color originals are
scanned in full color, and black & white
originals are scanned in binary black &
white.
Full Color Scan document in full color.
Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother
and finer finish.
Black & White Scan document in black and white.
Color mode Description
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Color Selection:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Store
1
Copy
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-35
8
7Press the U or V key to select [Copy] or [Send/
Store].
8Press the OK key. Color Selection appears.
9If the U or V key was pressed to select Copy,
select [Auto Color], [Full Color], or [Black & White].
If Send or Save was selected, select [Auto (Color/
Gray)], [Auto (Color/B&W)], [Full Color],
[Grayscale], or [Black & White].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Copy:
a
b
*********************
2
Full Color
3
Black & White
1
*Auto Color
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-36
File Format
Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below.
NOTE: Refer to page 5-12 for file formats.
Use the procedure below to select the default file format.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [File Format].
File Format Description
PDF Send files in PDF format.
TIFF Send files in TIFF format.
XPS Send files in XPS format.
JPEG Send files in JPEG format.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-37
8
6Press the OK key. File Format appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [PDF], [TIFF],
[XPS] or [JPEG].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Density
Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below.
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Density].
File Format:
a
b
*********************
2
TIFF
3
XPS
1
*PDF
Item Description
Manual (Normal 0) Set to (Normal 0) in the Manual density.
Auto Set to Auto density.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-38
6Press the OK key. Density appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Zoom
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available
default settings are shown below.
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Zoom].
Density:
a
b
1
Auto
*********************
2
*Manual
Item Description
100% Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).
Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the
originals to match paper size/ sending size.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-39
8
6Press the OK key. Zoom appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [100%] or [Auto].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
File Name Entry
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No.
can also be set.
The table below lists the additional information available.
NOTE:
• Refer to page 4-17 and page 5-21 for name entry.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
Use the procedure below to set the default file name.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
Zoom:
a
b
*********************
2
Auto
1
*100%
Item Description
None No additional information available.
Date Adds date and time.
Job No. Adds the job number.
Job No. + Date Adds the job number plus date and time.
Date + Job No. Adds date and time plus the job number.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-40
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [File Name Entry].
6Press the OK key. File Name Entry appears. Enter
the document name (up to 32 characters).
7Press the OK key. Additional Info appears.
8Press the U or V key to select [None], [Date],
[JobNo.], [JobNo. + Date] or [Date + JobNo.].
9Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Subject/Body
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals
by E-mail.
NOTE:
• Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-26.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
File name Entry:
A
b
doc 1
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Additional Info.:
a
b
*********************
2
Date
3
Job No.
1
None
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-41
8
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Subject/Body].
6Press the OK key. Subject Entry appears. Enter
the e-mail subject (up to 60 characters).
If you press the Back key, you can return to the
Function Default menu.
7Press the OK key. Body Entry appears. Enter e-
mail body text (up to 500 characters).
If you press the Back key, you can return to Subject
Entry.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Subject Entry:
K
b
abcdefghijklmnopqrstu
vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Body Entry:
a
b
abcdefghijklmnopqrstu
vwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWXYZ
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-42
Collate
Set the defaults for Collate. The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: Refer to page 3-20 for Collate/Offset.
Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Collate].
6Press the OK key. Collate appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
Item Description
Collate Off Collate not performed.
On Collate performed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Collate:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-43
8
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a
problem.
Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-10 for EcoPrint.
Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint].
Item Description
Off No EcoPrint performed.
On EcoPrint performed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-44
6Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the JPEG/TIFF Print default. The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: Refer to page 6-3 for JPEG/TIFF Print.
Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
EcoPrint:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Item Description
Paper Size Scaled to fit the paper size.
Image Resolution Matched to the image resolution.
Print Resolution Matched to the print resolution.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-45
8
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [JPEG/TIFF Print].
6Press the OK key. JPEG/TIFF Print appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Paper Size],
[Image Resolution] or [Print Resolution].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
XPS FitTo Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
Use the procedure below to set the default XPS FitTo Page setting.
NOTE: Refer to page 6-4 for XPS FitTo Page.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
JPEG/TIFF Print:
a
b
*********************
2
Image Resolution
T
3
Print Resolution
T
1
*Paper Size
g
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-46
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [XPS FitTo Page].
6Press the OK key. XPS FitTo Page appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.
Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
XPS FitTo Page:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-47
8
5Press the U or V key to select [File Separation].
6Press the OK key. File Separation appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [Each
Page].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Function Default menu.
2 in 1 Layout
Select the default value for layout when [2 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default
value are as follows:
Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
File Separation:
a
b
*********************
2
Each Page
1
*Off
Item Description
g L to R f T to B Arranges from left to right or top to bottom.
e R to L Arranges from right to left.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-48
5Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].
6Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [2 in 1 Layout].
8Press the OK key. 2 in 1 Layout appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [g L to R f T to
B] or [e R to L].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
4 in 1 Layout
Select the default value for layout when [4 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items available for the default
value are as follows:
Use the procedure below to select the default value for layout.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
Detail Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
4 in 1 Layout
3
Border Line
[ Exit ]
1
2 in 1 Layout
2 in 1 Layout
a
b
*********************
2
e
R to L
1
*
g
L to R
f
T to B
Item Description
h Right then Down Arranges from upper left to right.
i Down then Right Arranges from upper left to bottom.
j Left then Down Arranges from upper right to left.
k Down then Left Arranges from upper right to bottom.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-49
8
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].
6Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [4 in 1 Layout].
8Press the OK key. 4 in 1 Layout appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [h Right then
Down], [i Down then Right], [j Left then Down]
or [k Down then Left].
10
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Detail Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
4 in 1 Layout
3
Border Line
[ Exit ]
1
2 in 1 Layout
4 in 1 Layout:
a
b
*********************
2
i
Down then Right
3
j
Left then Down
1
*
h
Right then Down
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-50
Border Line
Select the default value for border line when [2 in 1 Layout] is selected for Combine. Items available for the
default value are as follows:
Use the procedure below to select the default value for border line.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].
6Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Border Line].
Item Description
None No border line.
l Solid Line Draws solid border lines.
m Dotted Line Draws dotted border lines.
n Positioning Mark Puts a mark on the border line position.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Detail Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
4 in 1 Layout
3
Border Line
[ Exit ]
1
2 in 1 Layout
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-51
8
8Press the OK key. Border Line appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [ None], [l Solid
Line], [m Dotted Line] or [n Positioning Mark].
10
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
Orig. Binding
Select the default value for the binding edge of the original when [2-sided>>1-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is
selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows:
Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the original.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
Border Line:
a
b
*********************
2
l
Solid Line
3
m
Dotted Line
1
* None
Item Description
o Left/Right Left/right binding
p Top Top binding
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-52
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].
6Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Orig. Binding].
8Press the OK key. Orig. Binding appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [o Left/Right] or
[ p Top].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Detail Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
4 in 1 Layout
3
Border Line
[ Exit ]
1
2 in 1 layout
Orig. Binding:
a
b
*********************
2
p
Top
1
*
o
Left/Right
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-53
8
Finish Binding
Select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2-
sided] is selected for Duplex. Items available for the default value are as follows:
Use the procedure below to select the default value for the binding edge of the finished copies.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].
6Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Finish Binding].
Item Description
o Left/Right Left/right binding
p Top Top binding
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Detail Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
4 in 1 Layout
3
Border Line
[ Exit ]
1
2 in 1 Layout
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-54
8Press the OK key. Finish Binding appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [ o Left/Right] or
[p Top].
10
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
Image Quality
Select the default value for image quality when File Format is selected. Select the default value in the range
from [1 Low(High Comp)] (high compression) to [5 High(Low Comp)] (low compression).
Use the procedure below to select the default value for image quality.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].
Finish.. Binding:
a
b
*********************
2
p
Top
1
*
o
Left/Right
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-55
8
6Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Image Quality].
8Press the OK key. Image Quality appears.
9Press the U or V key to select from [1 Low(High
Comp)] to [5 High(Low Comp)].
10
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
Color TIFF Comp.
Set the default value for compression method for TIFF images handled by this machine.
Use the procedure below to set the default value for color TIFF compression method.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
Detail Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
4 in 1 Layout
3
Border Line
[ Exit ]
1
2 in 1 layout
Image Quality:
a
b
*********************
2
2
3
3
1
*1 Low(High Comp)
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-56
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].
6Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Color TIFF
Comp.].
8Press the OK key. Color TIFF Comp. appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [TIFF V6] or
[TTN2].
10
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
PDF/A setting
You can set the default PDF/A setting used in the machine.
The procedure for specifying the default PDF/A setting is explained below.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Detail Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
4 in 1 Layout
3
Border Line
[ Exit ]
1
2 in 1 layout
Color TIFF Comp.:
a
b
*********************
2
TTN2
1
*TIFF V6
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-57
8
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Function Default].
4Press the OK key. The Function Default menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Detail Setting].
6Press the OK key. The Detail Setting menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [PDF/A].
8Press the OK key. The PDF/A menu appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [Off], [PDF/A-1a],
or [PDF/A-1b].
10
Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Detail Setting menu.
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Function Default:
a
b
*********************
2
Scan Resolution
3
FAX Resolution
[ Exit ]
1
Color Selection
Detail Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
4 in 1 Layout
3
Border Line
[ Exit ]
1
2 in 1 layout
PDF/A:
a
b
*********************
2
PDF/A-1a
3
PDF/A-1b
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-58
Login Operation
Specify the character entry method in the login screen that appears when user management is enabled.
Use the procedure below to adjust the Login Operation.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Login Operation].
4Press the OK key. Login Operation appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Use Numeric Key]
or [Select Character].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Common Settings menu.
Item Description
Use Numeric Key Use the numeric keys to select and enter
characters.
Select Character Enter characters by selecting them from
the character palette that appears.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Login Operation
:
a
b
*********************
2
Select Character
1
*Use Numeric Key
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-59
8
Optional Memory
If optional memory is installed, you can specify whether most of the memory is allocated to the copy function or
the print function.
Use the procedure below to adjust the Optional Memory.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Optional Memory].
4Press the OK key. Optional Memory appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Normal], [Printer
Priority] or [Copy Priority].
Item Description
Normal The optional memory is allocated to the
copy function or the print function based on
a previously selected setting.
Printer Priority This allocates most memory to data
spooling for sort copy. When copy priority is
specified, the number of pages that can be
printed in sort copying increases.
Copy Priority The amount of memory allocated to RAM
disk memory and the amount of memory
allocated to drawing can be increased.
When print priority is specified, the
maximum value that can be set in RAM
disk mode increases.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Optional Memory:
a
b
*********************
2
Printer Priority
3
Copy Priority
1
*Normal
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-60
6Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
7Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The machine is
restarted.
RAM Disk Mode
When optional memory is installed, a RAM disk can be created and its size can be set. Creating a RAM disk
makes it possible to print from a Job Box.
The procedure for setting the RAM Disk Mode is explained below.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [RAM Disk Mode].
4Press the OK key. RAM Disk Mode appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
6Press the OK key. If [Off] is selected, Completed.
appears and you return to the Common Settings
menu. If [On] is selected, the RAM disk size screen
appears.
Restart.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
RAM Disk Mode:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
RAM Disk Mode:
D
b
(1 - 512)
**216*
MB
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-61
8
7Enter the size of the RAM disk with the numeric
keys.
8Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
9Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The machine is
restarted.
Restart.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-62
Copy Settings
The following settings are available for copying functions.
• Photo Processing …8-62
• Paper Selection …8-63
• Auto Paper Selection …8-64
• Auto % Priority …8-65
• DP Read Action …8-66
• Select Key Set …8-68
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Photo Processing
Set the resolution for copying a photo.
Use the procedure below to set Photo Processing.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Copy].
2Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Photo Processing].
Item Description
Dithering(Normal) Sets the resolution to standard.
Dithering(Rough) Sets the resolution to low.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
8
Printer
9
Send
[ Exit ]
7
Copy
Copy:
a
b
*********************
2
Paper Selection
3
AutoPaperSelect.
[ Exit ]
1
Photo Processing
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-63
8
4Press the OK key. Photo Processing appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Dithering(Normal)]
or [Dithering(Rough)].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Copy menu.
Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Copy].
2Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Paper Selection].
Photo Processing:
a
b
*********************
2
Dithering(Rough)
1
*Dithering(Normal)
Item Description
Auto Automatically select the cassette
containing paper in the same size as
originals.
Def. PaperSource Select paper source set by Default Paper
Source (refer to page 8-21).
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
8
Printer
9
Send
[ Exit ]
7
Copy
Copy:
a
b
*********************
2
Paper Selection
3
AutoPaperSelect.
[ Exit ]
1
Photo Processing
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-64
4Press the OK key. Paper Selection appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Def.
Paper Source].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Copy menu.
Auto Paper Selection
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table
below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Copy].
2Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [AutoPaperSelect.].
Paper Selection:
a
b
*********************
2
Def. PaperSource
1
*Auto
Item Description
MostSuitableSize Select paper based on the current zoom
and the size of the original.
Same as OrigSize Select paper that matches the size of the
original, regardless the zoom.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
8
Printer
9
Send
[ Exit ]
7
Copy
Copy:
a
b
*********************
2
Paper Selection
3
AutoPaperSelect.
[ Exit ]
1
Photo Processing
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-65
8
4Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [MostSuitableSize]
or [Same as OrigSize].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Copy menu.
Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/
zoom) is performed.
The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Off.
Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Copy].
2Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Auto % Priority].
AutoPaperSelect.:
a
b
*********************
2
Same as OrigSize
1
*MostSuitableSize
Item Detail
Off No zoom performed (copied in original size).
On Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
8
Printer
9
Send
[ Exit ]
7
Copy
Copy:
a
b
*********************
2
Paper Selection
3
AutoPaperSelect.
[ Exit ]
1
Photo Processing
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-66
4Press the OK key. AutoPaperSelect. appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Copy menu.
DP Read Action
You can set whether priority is given to speed or image quality when scanning an original on the document
processor.
The table below shows the available settings. The default setting is Speed Priority.
Use the procedure below to specify the DP Read Action.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Copy].
2Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [DP Read Action].
4Press the OK key. DP Read Action appears.
Auto % Priority:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Item Detail
Speed Priority Priority is given to speed when scanning
Quality Priority Priority is given to image quality when scanning
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
8
Printer
9
Send
[ Exit ]
7
Copy
Copy:
a
b
*********************
2
Paper Selection
3
AutoPaperSelect.
[ Exit ]
1
Photo Processing
Auto % Priority:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-67
8
5Press the U or V key to select [Speed Priority] or
[Quality Priority].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Copy menu.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-68
Select Key Set
If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using
copy functions.
You can register one of the following functions to each key.
• None
• Paper Selection
• Collate
• Duplex
•Zoom
• Combine
•Original Size
• Orig.Orientation
• Original Image
• Density
• EcoPrint
• Continuous Scan
• File Name Entry
• JobFinish Notice
• Print Override
• Color Selection
• Color Balance
• Sharpness
• Backgrnd Density
• Saturation
Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Copy].
2Press the OK key. The Copy menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
8
Printer
9
Send
[ Exit ]
7
Copy
Copy:
a
b
*********************
2
Paper Selection
3
AutoPaperSelect.
[ Exit ]
1
Photo Processing
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-69
8
4Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right].
6Press the OK key. This displays the function
selection screen for the flexible key selected in
step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is
selected.
7Press the U or V key to select the function you
want to register to the flexible key.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Copy menu.
IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is
registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and
This function is already registered. is displayed.
Select Key Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Right
[ Exit ]
1
Left
Left:
a
b
4
Duplex
*********************
6
Combine
5
*Zoom
This function is
already registered.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-70
Sending Settings
The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options.
• Select Key Set …8-70
• Destination confirmation screen before transmission …8-72
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Select Key Set
If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when using
sending functions.
You can register one of the following functions to each key.
• None
• Color Selection
•Original Size
• Original Image
• Scan Resolution
• Sending Size
•Zoom
• Orig.Orientation
• Continuous Scan
• File Format
• File Name Entry
• Subject/Body
• JobFinish Notice
• FAX Resolution
• FAX Direct TX
• FAX Delayed TX
• FAX RX Polling
• Density
• Duplex
• FTP Encrypted TX
• File Separation
• Sharpness
• Backgrnd Density
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-71
8
Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Send].
2Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.].
4Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right].
6Press the OK key. This displays the function
selection screen for the flexible key selected in
step 5. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is
selected.
7Press the U or V key to select the function you
want to register to the flexible key.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Send menu.
IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is
registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and
This function is already registered. is displayed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
8
Printer
*********************
[ Exit ]
9
Send
Send:
a
b
*********************
2
DestinationCheck
[ Exit ]
1
Select Key Set.
Select Key Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Right
[ Exit ]
1
Left
Left:
a
b
2
Color Selection
*********************
4
Original Image
3
Original Size
This function is
already registered.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-72
Destination confirmation screen before transmission
You can specify whether or not the destination confirmation screen appears after the Start key is pressed or
after a destination is added or edited before transmission.
The table below shows the available settings..
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Send].
2Press the OK key. The Send menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select
[DestinationCheck].
4Press the OK key. The destination confirmation
menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Check before
Send] or [Check New Dest.].
Item Detail
Check beforeSend Specify whether or not the destination
confirmation screen appears before
transmission.
Check New Dest. Specify whether or not the destination
confirmation screen appears when the
destination is new.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
8
Printer
*********************
[ Exit ]
9
Send
Send:
a
b
*********************
2
DestinationCheck
[ Exit ]
1
Select Key Set.
DestinationCheck:
a
b
*********************
2
Check New Dest.
[ Exit ]
1
Check beforeSend
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-73
8
6Press the OK key. The menu of the selected
function appears.
The screen when the Check before Send menu is
selected is shown.
7Press the U or V key to select the function you
want to register to the flexible key.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Send menu.
Check beforeSend:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*OFF
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-74
Document Box Settings
The following settings are available for Document Box.
• Select Key Set …8-74
• Job Box …8-76
Select Key Set
If you register a function to the Left Select key or Right Select key, you can quickly set the function when
printing from or saving to a document box.
You can register one of the following functions to each key for either of printing from and saving to a document
box.
Print
• None
• Collate
• Paper Selection
• Duplex
• File Name Entry
• JobFinish Notice
• Print Override
• Color Selection
• Encrypted PDF
• JPEG/TIFF Print
• XPS FitTo Page
• Del. afterPrint
Store
• None
• Color Selection
•Original Size
• Original Image
• Scan Resolution
• Storing Size
•Zoom
• Orig.Orientation
• Continuous Scan
• File Format
• File Name Entry
• JobFinish Notice
• Density
• Duplex
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-75
8
• Sharpness
• Backgrnd Density
Use the procedure below to set Select Key Set.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Document Box].
2Press the OK key. The Document Box menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Select Key Set.].
4Press the OK key. Select Key Set. appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Print] or [Store].
6Press the OK key. This displays the flexible key
selection screen for the function selected in step 5.
The screen shown is the one when [Print] is
selected.
7Press the U or V key to select [Left] or [Right].
8Press the OK key. This displays the function
selection screen for the flexible key selected in
step 7. The screen shown is the one when [Left] is
selected.
9Press the U or V key to select the function you
want to register to the flexible key.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
<
Edit Destination
=
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]
;
Document Box
Document Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Select Key Set.
3
Polling Box
[ Exit ]
1
Sub Address Box
Select Key Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Store
[ Exit ]
1
Print
Print:
a
b
*********************
2
Right
[ Exit ]
1
Left
Left:
a
b
*********************
2
Collate
3
Paper Selection
1
None
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-76
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Document Box menu.
IMPORTANT: If you try to set the function that is
registered to the other flexible key, you cannot set it and
This function is already registered. is displayed.
Job Box
Job Box settings can be set. Select settings for Quick Copy Jobs and Job Retention Deletion. Quick Copy Jobs
sets the number of files that can be saved using Quick Copy. Job Ret. Deletion sets the period of time a job
retention file can be saved. When a file has been saved for longer than the period, it is automatically deleted.
Quick Copy Jobs
The procedure for setting Quick Copy Jobs is explained below.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Document Box].
2Press the OK key. The Document Box menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Job Box].
4Press the OK key. The Job Box screen appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Quick Copy Jobs].
This function is
already registered.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
<
Edit Destination
=
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]
;
Document Box
Document Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Select Key Set.
3
Polling Box
[ Exit ]
1
Sub Address Box
Job Box:
a
b
*********************
2
JobRet. Deletion
1
Quick Copy Jobs
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-77
8
6Press the OK key. The Quick Copy Jobs screen
appears.
7Enter the number of Quick Copy Jobs that can be
saved with the numeric keys.
8Press the OK key. Completed. appears and you
return to the Common Settings menu.
Job Retention Deletion
The procedure for setting Job Retention Deletion is explained below.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Document Box].
2Press the OK key. The Document Box menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Job Box].
4Press the OK key. The Job Box screen appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Job Ret. Deletion].
6Press the OK key. The Job Retention Deletion
screen appears.
Quick Copy Jobs:
D
b
(1 - 50)
****0*
job(s)
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
<
Edit Destination
=
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]
;
Document Box
Document Box:
a
b
*********************
2
Select Key Set.
3
Polling Box
[ Exit ]
1
Sub Address Box
Job Box:
a
b
*********************
2
JobRet. Deletion
1
Quick Copy Jobs
JobRet. Deletion:
a
b
*********************
2
1 hour
3
4 hours
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-78
7Press the U or V key to select the period that jobs
are retained.
8Press the OK key. Completed. appears and you
return to the Common Settings menu.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-79
8
Printer Settings
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the
following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
• Emuration Set …8-79
• Color Setting …8-82
• EcoPrint …8-82
• Override A4/LTR …8-83
• Duplex …8-84
• Copies …8-85
• Orientation …8-87
•Gloss Mode …8-88
• Wide A4 …8-89
• FormFeed Timeout …8-89
•LF Action …8-90
•CR Action …8-91
• Print Offset …8-92
• Paper Feed Mode…8-93
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Emuration Set
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.
Selection of emulation
This machine can emulate the following printers:
•PCL6
• KPDL
• KPDL(Auto)
NOTE: When [KPDL (Auto)] is selected for the emulation mode, automatic switching between KPDL and
PCL6 (substitute emulation) takes place based on the print data.
Use the procedure below to select the emulation.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-80
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Emuration Set.].
4Press the OK key. Emuration Set. appears.
5Press the U or V key to select the printer you want
to emulate.
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
NOTE: If you select [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], the
operation after selecting the emulation is different from
others.
If you select [KPDL], refer to page 8-80.
If you select [KPDL(Auto)], refer to page 8-81.
When KPDL Is Selected for Emulation
When you use the KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting
is Off.
Use the procedure below to make the setting.
1In Emulation Set, press the U or V key to select
[KPDL].
2Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Emulation Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
KPDL
3
KPDL(Auto)
1
*PCL6
Emulation Set.:
a
b
1
PCL6
*********************
3
KPDL(Auto)
2
KPDL
KPDL Error Rpt:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-81
8
3Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
4Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
When KPDL(Auto) Is Selected for Emulation
When you select [KPDL(Auto)], set whether or not to output KPDL error reports. The default setting is Off.
Use the procedure below to make the setting.
1In Emulation Set, press the U or V key to select
[KPDL(Auto)].
2Press the OK key. KPDL Error Rpt appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
4Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Emulation Set.:
a
b
1
PCL6
2
KPDL
*********************
3
KPDL(Auto)
KPDL Error Rpt:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-82
Color Setting
You can select whether status reports are printed in color or black & white.
Use the procedure below to select the Color Setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Color Setting].
4Press the OK key. Color Setting appears.
5Press the U or V key to select to select [Color] or
[Black & White].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a
problem.
Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Color Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Black & White
1
*Color
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-83
8
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [EcoPrint].
4Press the OK key. EcoPrint appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Override A4/LTR
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table
below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting. The default setting is On.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
EcoPrint:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Item Description
On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in
size. The machine will use whichever size
is in the paper source.
Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the
same in size.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-84
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Override A4/LTR].
4Press the OK key. Override A4/LTR appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Duplex
Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Override A4/LTR:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
Item Description Finish
Off No duplex mode
Bind Long
Edge Longer edge
bound
Bind Short
Edge Shorter edge
bound
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-85
8
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Duplex].
4Press the OK key. Duplex appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Off], [Bind Long
Edge] or [Bind Short Edge].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Copies].
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Duplex:
a
b
*********************
2
Bind Long Edge
3
Bind Short Edge
1
*Off
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-86
4Press the OK key. Copies appears.
5Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to set
the default number of copies.
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Copies:
D
b
(1 - 999)
*******1*
copies
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-87
8
Orientation
Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.
Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Orientation].
4Press the OK key. Orientation appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Portrait] or
[Landscape].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Printer Printer
Portrait Landscape
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Orientation:
a
b
*********************
2
Landscape
1
*Portrait
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-88
Gloss Mode
Gloss Mode, when set to High, increases the effect of glossiness in printing by reducing the printing speed by
half.
IMPORTANT: Gloss Mode is not available when Labels and Transparency is selected as the paper type setting.
Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause wrinkle in paper. To reduce wrinkle, try using
thicker paper.
Use the procedure below to select Gloss mode.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Gloss Mode].
4Press the OK key. Gloss Mode appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Low] or [High].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Gloss Mode:
a
b
*********************
2
High
1
*Low
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-89
8
Wide A4
Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for an A4 page (78
characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL 6
emulation.
Use the procedure below to select Wide A4.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Wide A4].
4Press the OK key. Wide A4 appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
FormFeed Timeout
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling
that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine
automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.
Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Wide A4:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-90
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [FormFeed
Timeout].
4Press the OK key. FormFeed Timeout appears.
5Press the U or V key to set the Form Feed
Timeout. You can set the timeout delay in seconds.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this
value.
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). The table below
shows the available settings. The default setting is LF Only.
Use the procedure below to specify a LF action.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
FormFeed TimeOut:
D
b
(5 - 495)
******30*
Sec.
Item Description
LF Only Only line feed performed.
LF and CR Line feed and character return performed.
Ignore LF No line feed performed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-91
8
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [LF Action].
4Press the OK key. LF Action appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [LF Only], [LF and
CR] or [Ignore LF].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
CR Action
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The
table below shows the available settings. The default setting is CR Only.
Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
EcoPrint
3
Override A4/LTR
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
LF Action:
M
b
*********************
2
LF and CR
3
Ignore LF
1
*LF Only
Item Description
CR Only Only character return performed.
LF and CR Character return and line feed performed.
Ignore CR No character return performed.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-92
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [CR Action].
4Press the OK key.
5Press the U or V key to select [CR Only], [LF and
CR] or [Ignore CR].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Print Offset
Print range correction can be used to correct the horizontal and vertical print ranges in order to correct image
skew.
Use the procedure below to set the Print Offset.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Print Offset].
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
EcoPrint
3
Override A4/LTR
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
CR Action:
a
b
*********************
2
LF and CR
3
Ignore CR
1
*CR Only
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
Color Setting
3
EcoPrint
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-93
8
4Press the OK key. The vertical print range
correction menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to set the vertical range
correction value.
6Press the OK key. The horizontal print range
correction menu appears.
7Press the U or V key to set the horizontal range
correction value.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Paper Feed Mode
Set the default value of the paper feed direction used for the printer functions. The default setting is Auto.
Use the procedure below to set Paper Feed Mode.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Printer].
2Press the OK key. The Printer menu appears.
Print Offset(V):
D
b
(-76.0 - +76.0)
x
****76.0*
mm.
-
Print Offset(H):
D
b
(-76.0 - +76.0)
J
****76.0*
mm.
-
Item Description
Auto Sets the paper feed direction automatically.
Fixed Sets the paper feed direction the same as
in the previous printing operation.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
7
Copy
*********************
9
Send
[ Exit ]
8
Printer
Printer:
a
b
*********************
2
EcoPrint
3
Override A4/LTR
[ Exit ]
1
Emulation Set.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-94
3Press the U or V key to select [Paper Feed
Mode].
4Press the OK key. Paper Feed Mode appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Fixed].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Printer menu.
Paper Feed Mode:
a
b
*********************
2
Fixed
1
*Auto
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-95
8
Printing Reports/Sending Notice
Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also
be configured.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges.
You can select whether status reports are printed in color or black & white. Refer to Color Setting on 8-82
Printing Reports
Printable reports are as follows.
Menu map
Outputs a menu map of this machine.
Status Page
Check the information including current settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Statu s Pag e
FS-C2126MFP
Firmware V ersio n
Menu Map
Statu s Pag e
FS-C2126MFP
Firmware V ersio n
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-96
Font List
Check the font samples installed in the machine.
Use the procedure below to print a Menu Map / Status Page / Font List.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Report].
2Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Report Print].
4Press the OK key. The Report Print menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Menu Map],
[Status Page] or [Font List].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
2
Counter
3
System
[ Exit ]
1
Report
Report:
a
b
*********************
2
Admin Rpt Set.
3
Result Rpt Set.
[ Exit ]
1
Report Print
Report Print:
a
b
*********************
2
Status Page
3
Font List
[ Exit ]
1
Menu Map
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-97
8
6Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
The screen shown is the one when Status Page is
selected.
7Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected
report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Report Print menu.
NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Now, the machine is prohibited to be used. is displayed and
the output is canceled.
Service Status Page
More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service
status pages for maintenance purpose.
Network Status Page
Check the information including network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
Use the procedure below to print a Service Status / Network Status.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
Print.
Are you sure?
z
Status Page
[ Yes ] [ No ]
FS-C2126MFP
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
<
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
=
Adjust/Maint.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-98
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting].
4Press the OK key. Service Setting appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Service Status] or
[Network Status].
6Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
The screen shown is the one when Network Status
is selected.
7Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected
report is output. Accepted. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
NOTE: When acceptance of jobs is prohibited, Now, the machine is prohibited to be used. is displayed and
the output is canceled.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Service Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Network Status
3
Test Page
[ Exit ]
1
Service Status
Print.
Are you sure?
z
Network Status
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-99
8
Send Result Report
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the
available settings. The default setting is Error Only.
Use the procedure below to send a Result Report.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Report].
2Press the OK key. The Report menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Result Rpt Set.].
4Press the OK key. The Result Rpt Set. menu
appears.
Item Description
Off No result report printed.
On Result report automatically printed.
Transmitted images can also be attached.
Error Only Result report printed only when a
transmission ends in an error. If two or
more destinations are registered, the
reports are printed only for the destinations
with the errors. Transmitted images can
also be attached.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
2
Counter
3
System
[ Exit ]
1
Report
Report:
a
b
*********************
2
Admin Rpt Set.
3
Result Rpt Set.
[ Exit ]
1
Report Print
Result Rpt Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
FAX RX Result
3
JobFinish Notice
[ Exit ]
1
Send Result
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-100
5Press the U or V key to select [Send Result]. The
Send Result menu appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [E-mail/Folder],
[FAX] or [CancelBeforeSend]. Selected menu
appears.
NOTE: Selecting [CancelBeforeSend] can be
specified whether the machine prints the report when
canceling the operation before sending.
When selecting [Off] in both E-mail/Folder and FAX
menu, [CancelBeforeSend] is not displayed.
7Press the U or V key to select [Off], [On] or [Error
Only].
When selecting [CancelBeforeSend], press the U
or V key to select [Off] or [On]
8Press the OK key. A Result Report is sent.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Send Result menu.
Send Result:
a
b
*********************
2
FAX
3
CancelBeforeSend
[ Exit ]
1
E-mail/Folder
E-mail/Folder:
a
b
1
Off
2
On
*********************
3
*Error Only
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-101
8
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
• Copy Denst. Adj. …8-101
• Send/Box Density …8-102
• AutoColorCorrect …8-103
• ColorCalibration …8-104
• Color Regist. …8-104
• Correct. Bk Line …8-111
• LaserScanner Cln (Laser scanner cleaning mode setting) …8-112
• Drum Refresh (Drum refresh mode setting) …8-113
• Altitude Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting) …8-114
• MC (Main charger output setting) …8-115
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Copy Denst. Adj.
Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes.
Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Copy Denst. Adj.].
4Press the OK key. Copy Denst. Adj. appears.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
:
Document Box
;
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
<
Adjust/Maint.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Copy Denst. Adj.:
a
b
*********************
2
Manual
[ Exit ]
1
Auto
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-102
5Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].
6Press the OK key. This displays the density
selection screen for the mode selected in step 5.
The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is
selected.
7Press the U or V key to select the density from [-
3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
Send/Box Density
Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels
both in auto and manual density modes.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Send/Box
Density].
4Press the OK key. Send/Box Density appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Auto] or [Manual].
Manual:
a
b
3
-1
*********************
5
+1
4
* 0 Normal
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
:
Document Box
;
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
<
Adjust/Maint.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Send/Box Density:
a
b
*********************
2
Manual
[ Exit ]
1
Auto
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-103
8
6Press the OK key. This displays the density
selection screen for the mode selected in step 5.
The screen shown is the one when [Manual] is
selected.
7Press the U or V key to select the density from [-
3 Lighter] to [+3 Darker].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
AutoColorCorrect
This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is
color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being
identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and
white.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [AutoColorCorrect].
4Press the OK key. AutoColorCorrect appears.
5Press theU or V key to select a value from [5] to
[1].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
Manual:
a
b
3
-1
*********************
5
+1
4
* 0 Normal
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
:
Document Box
;
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
<
Adjust/Maint.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
AutoColorCorrect:
a
b
*********************
2
4
3
3
1
5
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-104
ColorCalibration
This machine contains a calibration function that automatically makes adjustments to compensate for changes
that occur over time due to variations in the ambient temperature and humidity. So that the highest quality color
printing can be maintained, this color calibration operation is carried out automatically each time the power to
the machine is turned on. If color tone does not improve or color drift does not improve after executing this color
adjustment, perform color print position correction on page 8-104.
Use the procedure below to set the Color Calibration.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [ColorCalibration].
4Press the OK key. ColorCalibration appears.
5Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute Color
Calibration.
6Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Adjust/Maint. menu.
Color Regist.
When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this
function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift. Normal
registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected
through normal registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the detailed
settings.
NOTE: To perform color registration, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
<
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
=
Adjust/Maint.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Start the color
calibration.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-105
8
IMPORTANT: Before performing color registration, be sure to perform color calibration (see page 8-104). If
color drift remains, perform color registration. By performing color registration without performing color
calibration, the color drift will be resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.
Normal Registration
Follow the steps below to correct normal color drift.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Color Regist.].
4Press the OK key. Color Regist. appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Normal].
6Press the OK key. The normal registration
appears. Press the U or V key to select [Print
Chart].
7Press the OK key. The chart print confirmation
menu appears.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
<
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
=
Adjust/Maint.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Color Regist.:
a
b
*********************
2
Detail
[ Exit ]
1
Normal
Normal:
a
b
*********************
2
Adjust Magenta
3
Adjust Cyan
1
Print Chart
Print.
Are you sure?
w
Registration chart.
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-106
8Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute chart
printing. After the charts are printed, you will return
to the standard menu of color print position
correction.
Three charts, H-L (left), V (center), and H-R (right)
are printed on one sheet of paper for each of the
colors M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y (yellow).
<Chart Example>
IHGFEDCBA0123456789
MH-L
IHGFEDCBA0123456789
CH-L
IHGFEDCBA0123456789
YH-L
IHGFEDCBA0123456789
MH-R
IHGFEDCBA0123456789
CH-R
IHGFEDCBA0123456789
YH-R
MV
98
6
4
2
0
B
D
F
H
7
5
3
1
A
C
E
G
I
CV
YV
98
6
4
2
0
B
D
F
H
7
5
3
1
A
C
E
G
I
98
6
4
2
0
B
D
F
H
7
5
3
1
A
C
E
G
I
Color Registration Correction Chart
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-107
8
9Press the U or V key to select [Adjust Magenta].
Press the OK key. The magenta correction menu
appears.
10 In the color registration correction chart printed in
Print Registration Chart above, note the numbers
of the sections in the magenta H and V charts
where the lines most closely coincide as a single
straight line. In the left example, the value would be
B.
11 Press Y or Z key to change items (H-L, V and H-
R). Press U or V key to enter the value read from
the chart and press [OK].
Magenta correction is performed. After a brief
interval you will return to the standard menu of
color print position correction.
Press U key to increase the value from 0 to 9. To
decrease, press V.
By pressing V, the value changes from 0 to
alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the
reverse direction, press U.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these
values.
12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 to correct cyan and yellow.
Detailed Settings
Follow the steps below to perform more detailed correction.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
Normal:
a
b
*********************
2
Adjust Magenta
3
Adjust Cyan
1
Print Chart
Adjust Magenta:
a
b
(I - A, 0 - 9)
H-L:
***
V: 0 H-R: 0
0
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
<
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
=
Adjust/Maint.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-108
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Color Regist.].
4Press the OK key. Color Regist. appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Detail].
6Press the OK key. The normal registration
appears. Press the U or V key to select [Print
Chart].
7Press the OK key. The chart print confirmation
menu appears.
8Press [Yes] (the Left Select key) to execute chart
printing. After the charts are printed, you will return
to the standard menu of color print position
correction.
Two charts, H-1 to H-5V (upper) and V-3 (lower)
are printed on one sheet of paper for each of the
colors M (magenta), C (cyan), and Y (yellow).
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Color Regist.:
a
b
*********************
2
Detail
[ Exit ]
1
Normal
Detail:
a
b
*********************
2
Adjust Magenta
3
Adjust Cyan
1
Print Chart
Print.
Are you sure?
w
Registration chart.
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-109
8
<Chart Example>
9Press the U or V key to select [Adjust Magenta].
Press the OK key. The magenta correction menu
appears.
Detail:
a
b
*********************
2
Adjust Magenta
3
Adjust Cyan
1
Print Chart
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-110
10 In the color registration correction chart printed in
Print Registration Chart above, note the numbers
of the sections in the magenta H and V charts
where the lines most closely coincide as a single
straight line. In the left example, the value would be
B.
11 Press Y or Z key to change items (H-1 to H-5, V-
3). Press U or V key to enter the value read from
the chart and press [OK].
Magenta correction is performed. After a brief
interval you will return to the standard menu of
color print position correction.
Press U key to increase the value from 0 to 9. To
decrease, press V.
By pressing V, the value changes from 0 to
alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the
reverse direction, press U.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these
values.
12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 to correct cyan and yellow.
Adjust Magenta:
a
b
(I - A, 0 - 9)
H-1:
***
H-2: 0 H-3: 0
H-4:
***
H-5: 0 V-3: 0
0
　
0
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-111
8
Correct. Bk Line
Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the
document processor is used.
The table below shows the available settings.
NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is recommended to
keep the default ([Off]).
Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
Item Description
Off No correction performed.
On(Low) Correction performed. The reproduction of
the image becomes lower when using Off.
On(High) Correction performed. Select this item if
black streak remains after using On (Low).
The reproduction of the image becomes
lower when using On (Low).
K
Paper feed
direction
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
<
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
=
Adjust/Maint.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-112
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Correct. Bk Line].
4Press the OK key. Correct. Bk Line appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Off], [On(Low)] or
[On(High)].
6Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
LaserScanner Cln (Laser scanner cleaning mode setting)
This sets the cleaning mode for the laser scanner. When the printing quality declines, cleaning the laser scanner
can restore the printing quality.
Use the procedure below to set the laser scanner cleaning mode setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting].
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Correct. Bk Line:
a
b
*********************
2
On(Low)
3
On(High)
1
*Off
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
<
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
=
Adjust/Maint.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-113
8
4Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [LaserScanner
Cln].
6Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
7Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is
displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/
Maint. menu.
Drum Refresh (Drum refresh mode setting)
This sets the refresh mode for the drum. When the printing quality declines, refreshing the drum can restore the
printing quality.
Use the procedure below to set the drum refresh mode setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting].
Service Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Network Status
3
Test Page
[ Exit ]
1
Service Status
Start the laser
scanner cleaning.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
<
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
=
Adjust/Maint.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-114
4Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Drum Refresh].
6Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
7Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is
displayed and the screen returns to the Adjust/
Maint. menu.
Altitude Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting)
This sets the altitude adjustment mode. If you are using the machine at an altitude of 1500 m or higher and print
quality has deteriorated, the Altitude Adjustment mode setting can be used to restore print quality.
Use the procedure below to set the altitude adjustment setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting].
Service Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Network Status
3
Test Page
[ Exit ]
1
Service Status
Start the drum
refresh.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
<
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
=
Adjust/Maint.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-115
8
4Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Altitude Adj.].
6Press the OK key. Altitude Adj. appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Normal], [High 1]
or [High 2)].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
MC (Main charger output setting)
This sets the output of the main charger. When print quality has deteriorated, the output of the main charger
can be changed to restore print quality.
NOTE: This menu only appears when the Altitude Adj. (Altitude adjustment setting) on page 8-114 is set to
[Normal].
Use the procedure below to set the main charger output setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Adjust/Maint.].
2Press the OK key. The Adjust/Maint. menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Service Setting].
Service Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Network Status
3
Test Page
[ Exit ]
1
Service Status
Altitude Adj.:
a
b
*********************
2
High 1
3
High 2
1
*Normal
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
<
Edit Destination
*********************
[ Exit ]
=
Adjust/Maint.
Adjust/Maint.:
a
b
*********************
2
Send/Box Density
3
AutoColorCorrect
[ Exit ]
1
Copy Denst. Adj.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-116
4Press the OK key. The Service Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [MC].
6Press the OK key. MC appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [1] to [3].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Adjust/Maint. menu.
Service Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Network Status
3
Test Page
[ Exit ]
1
Service Status
MC:
a
b
1
1
2
2
*********************
3
*3
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-117
8
Date/Timer
Date/Timer settings include:
• Date/Time …8-117
• Date Format …8-119
•Time Zone …8-120
• Summer Time …8-121
• Auto Error Clear …8-122
•Sleep Timer …8-125
• Sleep Level …8-126
• Auto Panel Reset …8-128
• Unusable Time …8-130
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Date/Time
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and
time set here will be displayed on the header.
CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.
Use the procedure below to set the date and time.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and
press the OK key.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-118
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in.
4The Date Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Date/Time].
6Press the OK key. The screen to enter the date of
Date/Time appears.
7Set the date.
Press the Y or Z key to move to the item (Year /
Month / Day) you want to enter.
Press the U or V key to set each item.
8Press the OK key. The screen to enter the time of
Date/Time appears.
9Set the time.
Press the Y or Z key to move to the item (Hour /
Min. / Second) you want to enter.
Press the U or V key to set each item.
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Date Settings menu.
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Date Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Date Format
3
Time Zone
[ Exit ]
1
Date/Time
Date/Time:
a
b
Year Month Day
*2009*
01 01
(Time Zone:Tokyo )
Date/Time:
a
b
Hour Min. Second
****11
: 45: 50
(Time Zone:Tokyo )
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-119
8
NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial
application is running, the If you change Date/Time
setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you
sure? message is displayed. To change the date/time,
press [Yes](the Left Select key).
Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.
Use the procedure below to select the date format.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and
press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
4The Date Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Date Format]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Date Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Date Format
3
Time Zone
[ Exit ]
1
Date/Time
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-120
.6Press the OK key. Date Format appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Month/Day/Year],
[Day/Month/Year] or [Year/Month/Day].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Date Settings menu.
Time Zone
Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT.
Use the procedure below to set the time difference.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and
press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
4 The Date Settings menu appears.
Date Format:
a
b
*********************
2
Day/Month/Year
3
Year/Month/Day
1
*Month/Day/Year
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Menu ] [ Login ]
Date Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Date Format
3
Time Zone
[ Exit ]
1
Date/Time
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-121
8
5Press the U or V key to select [Time Zone].
6Press the OK key. Time Zone appears.
7Press the U or V key to select your location.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Date Settings menu.
NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize
summer time, the summer time setting screen will not
appear.
Summer Time
Set whether or not to apply summer time to the display of the date.
Use the procedure below to set Summer Time.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Date Setting], and
press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
Time Zone:
a
b
*********************
2
-11:00 Midway
3
-10:00 Hawaii
1
-12:00 Internati
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Menu ] [ Login ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-122
4The Date Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Summer Time].
6Press the OK key. Summer Time appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Date Settings menu.
Auto Error Clear
If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto
Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses.
The following errors are automatically cleared.
Cannot duplex print on this paper.
Send error.
Cannot connect to Authentication Server.
Incorrect account ID. Job is canceled.
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot print.
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Cannot scan.
Job not stored. Press [OK].
Job Accounting restriction exceeded. Job is canceled.
Sub address/Polling box limit exceeded. Job is canceled.
Memory is full. Print job cannot be processed completely.
Maximum Number of scanned pages. Job is canceled.
Print overrun.
KPDL error.
USB memory error. Job is canceled.
No multi copies. Press [OK].
Auto Error Clear ON/OFF
Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.
Date Setting:
a
b
*********************
3
Time Zone
4
Summer Time
[ Exit ]
2
Date Format
Summer Time:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-123
8
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and
press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
4The Timer Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Auto Err. Clear].
6Press the OK key. Auto Err. Clear appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
Error Clear Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors.
Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 30 minutes.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Timer Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Sleep Timer
3
PanelReset Timer
[ Exit ]
1
Err. Clear Timer
Auto Err. Clear:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-124
If you set 0 as the time, errors are not displayed.
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and
press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
4The Timer Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Err. Clear Timer].
6Press the OK key. Err. Clear Timer appears.
7Press the U or V key to set the Error Clear Timer.
Set the amount of time before clearing errors in
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Timer Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Sleep Timer
3
PanelReset Timer
[ Exit ]
1
Err. Clear Timer
Err. Clear Timer:*
b
(5 - 495)
******30*
sec.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-125
8
seconds. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter
this value.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
Sleep Timer
Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute)
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time. The default setting is 1 minute.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and
press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
4The Timer Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Sleep Timer].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Timer Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Sleep Timer
3
PanelReset Timer
[ Exit ]
1
Err. Clear Timer
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-126
6Press the OK key. Sleep Timer appears.
7Press the U or V key to set the Sleep Timer. Set
the amount of time before entering the sleep state
in minutes. You cannot use the numeric keys to
enter this value.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
Sleep Level
Detailed settings can be selected for sleep mode. Detailed settings for sleep mode are called Energy Saver
mode. When a function is set in Energy Saver mode and the function sends data to the machine, the machine
does not execute the function. When Quick Recovery is specified, the machine wakes from sleep mode when
any kind of data is received.
Example: When print data is sent from a PC connected by USB
NOTE: On a product with the fax function, the setting is fixed at Quick Recovery.
Use the procedure below to specify the Sleep Level.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and
press the OK key.
Sleep Timer:
D
b
(1 - 240)
******15*
min.
Quick Recovery When the machine receives print data, it wakes from sleep mode and starts
printing.
Energy Saver The machine does not wake from sleep mode when it receives print data and
printing does not take place.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-127
8
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
4The Timer Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Sleep Level].
6Press the OK key. Sleep Level appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Quick Recovery]
or [Energy Saver].
8Select [Quick Recovery] and press the OK key.
Completed. appears and you return to the timer
settings menu.
Select [Energy Saver] and press the OK key. The
detailed settings screen of Energy Saver mode
appears.
9Press the U or V key to select the desired item.
Items that can be set are as follows:
•Network
• USB Cable
• Card Reader
• RAM Disk
•NIC
10 Press the OK key. The setting screen of each item
appears.
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Timer Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Sleep Timer
3
PanelReset Timer
[ Exit ]
1
Err. Clear Timer
Sleep Action:
a
b
*********************
2
Energy Saver
1
Quick Recovery
Energy Saver:
a
b
*********************
2
USB Cable
3
Card Reader
1
Network
Network:
a
b
*********************
2
Prohibit
1
*Permit
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-128
11 Press the U or V key to select [Permit] or
[Prohibit]. When [Permit] is set for a function and
that function sends data to the machine when the
machine is in Energy Saver mode, the machine will
not execute the function.
12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
Auto Panel Reset
If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.
NOTE: Refer to page 8-29 for the default settings.
Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF
Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting. The default setting is On.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and
press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-129
8
4The Timer Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Auto Panel Reset].
6Press the OK key. Auto Panel Reset appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Off] or [On].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
Panel Reset Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are
between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). The default setting is 90 seconds.
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the reset time.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and
press the OK key.
Timer Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Sleep Timer
3
PanelReset Timer
[ Exit ]
1
Err. Clear Timer
Auto Panel Reset:
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-130
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
4The Timer Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Panel Reset
Timer].
6Press the OK key. Panel Reset Timer appears.
7Press the U or V key to set the Panel Reset Timer.
Set the amount of time before resetting the
message display on the panel in seconds. You
cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
Unusable Time
You can specify the prohibition period to use.
Use the procedure below to set the Unusable Time.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Common Settings].
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Timer Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Sleep Timer
3
PanelReset Timer
[ Exit ]
1
Err. Clear Timer
PanelReset Timer:
D
b
(5 - 495)
******90*
sec.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
4
User/Job Account
5
User Property
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Common Settings
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-131
8
2Press the OK key. The Common Settings menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Timer Setting], and
press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
4The Timer Settings menu appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Unusable Time].
6Press the OK key. Unusable Time appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [On].
8Press the OK key. Start Time appears.
9Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the
Start Time.
Common Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
Default Screen
3
Sound
[ Exit ]
1
Language
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Timer Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Sleep Timer
3
PanelReset Timer
[ Exit ]
1
Err. Clear Timer
Unusable Time:
a
b
7
Off
*********************
[ Exit ]
8
On
Start Time:
a
b
Hour Min.
***11*
:
45
(Current Time 11:45)
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-132
10 Press the OK key. Start Time appears.
11 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the
End Time.
12 Press the OK key. Unlock Code appears.
13 Press the U or V key or numeric keys to set the
unlock code.
14 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Timer Settings menu.
End Time:
a
b
Hour Min.
***07*
:
00
(Current Time 11:45)
Unlock Code:
a
b
(0000 - 0000)
********99***
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-133
8
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One-Touch Keys)
Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One-touch keys. The saved destinations can be
changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission.
Adding an Individual Destination
A maximum of 100 individual addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No..
NOTE:
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with
administrator privileges. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
• Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Edit Destination].
2Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Address Book].
4Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen
appears.
5Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu
appears.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
*********************
=
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]
<
Edit Destination
Edit Destination:
a
b
*********************
2
Print List
[ Exit ]
1
Addressbook
Addressbook:
a
b
*********************
l
Fiala
l
Maury
[ Menu ]
k
Design
Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Delete
3
Add Address
4
Search(Name)
1
Detail Edit
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-134
6Press the U or V key to select [Add Address].
7Press the OK key. Add Address appears.
8Press the U or V key to select [Contact].
9Press the OK key. This displays the screen for
editing destinations.
NOTE: If the maximum number of destinations has
already been registered, the screen will display
Registered numbers exceeded. and return to the
Address Book.
10 Enter each item and then press the OK key.
Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Address Book list screen.
Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter
each item.
Entering Contact Name
1Press the Y or Z key to select [Contact Name].
2Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry
screen appears.
3Enter the contact name.
If creating a new contact name, the address
number allocated to the destination is already
entered.
4Press the OK key. The contact name is registered.
Add Address:
a
b
*********************
2
Group
1
Contact
Detail:
C
b
Contact Name 1/7
Sally
[ Edit ]
Detail:
C
b
Contact Name 1/7
Sally
[ Edit ]
Contact Name:
A
b
Sally
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-135
8
Entering E-mail Address
1Press the Y or Z key to display E-mail Address.
2Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry
screen appears.
3Enter the e-mail address.
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the
Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-44.
4Press the OK key. The e-mail address is
registered.
Entering Folder (SMB/FTP) Address
Folder (SMB) Address
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Detail:
C
b
p
E-mail Address: 4/7
t_maury@kyoceramita.
N
[ Edit ]
Address Entry:
B
b
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Item Description Max. No. of Characters
Host Name*
* If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the "Host name:
port number" format. (E.g. SMBhostname: 140)
Host name or IP address of the
sending computer 64 chars
Path Path to the folder used to save
files
E.g. "\User\ScanData"
128 chars
Login User Name User name for folder access
For example,
abcdnet\james.smith
64 chars
Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-136
Folder (FTP) Address
The table below explains the items to be entered.
1Press the Y or Z key to display Folder(SMB) or
Folder(FTP).
2Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry
screen appears.
3Enter the host name.
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the
Address Book or the One-touch keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-44.
Enclose the IPv6 address in brackets [ ].
Item Description Max. No. of Characters
Host Name*
* If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Hostname: port
number" format. (E.g. FTPhostname: 140)
Host name or IP address of the
sending computer 64 chars
Path Path to the folder used to save
files
E.g. "\User\ScanData"
128 chars
Login User Name User name for folder access
For example,
abcdnet\james.smith
64 chars
Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars
Encryption If secure communication is On,
encryption method can be
selected from Auto, DES, 3DES
and AES.
-
Detail:
C
b
Folder(SMB): 4/6
Ntid7004
[ Edit ]
Host Name(SMB):
A
b
Osaka SD
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Host Name(FTP):
A
b
Osaka SD
*
ABC
[ Text ]
or
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-137
8
4Press the OK key. Path appears.
5Enter the path name.
6Press the OK key. Login User Name appears.
7Enter the Login User Name.
8Press the OK key. Login Password appears.
9Enter the Login Password.
10
Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
NOTE: If the screen for confirming the entry of a new
destination (page 8-72) is set to [On], screens to
confirm the entered host name and path name appear.
Enter the same host name and path name again and
press the OK key on their respective screens.
Path:
A
b
SD3\report
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Login User Name:
A
b
Maury
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Login Password:
A
b
OOOOOOOOOOO
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Check the connection.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-138
11
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). This makes a
connection with the entered destination.
If the connection is successful, Connected. is
displayed on the screen. Press [OK] (the Right
Select key). Completed. is displayed and the
folder (SMB/FTP) address is registered.
If the connection failed, Cannot connect. is
displayed. Press [OK] (the Right Select key). The
screen shown in step 2 reappears. Check and re-
enter the destination.
Address Number
Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address
number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 100 numbers for individuals and
20 numbers for groups.
1Press the Y or Z key to display Address Number.
2Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry
screen appears.
3Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter
the address number.
4Press the OK key. The address number is
registered.
NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already
registered, the screen will display This address
number is already registered. and return to the screen
of step 2.
Dest. Confirm.:
a
b
p
Morgan@kyoceramita
N
b
0667640000*********
b
0667741234
[ Exit ]
Detail:
C
b
Address Number: 6/6
053
[ Edit ]
Address Number:
D
b
(001 - 120)
*****053*
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-139
8
Adding a Group
Compile two or more individuals into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When
adding a group, a maximum of 20 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging
in with administrator privileges.
Before adding a group in the Address Book, the individuals to be included in the group must be added first. Up
to 100 destinations for the e-mail, 100 destinations for the FAX, and the total of 10 destinations for the FTP and
SMB can be registered per a group.
Use the procedure below to register a group.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Edit Destination].
2Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Address Book].
4Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen
appears.
5Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [Add Address].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
*********************
=
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]
<
Edit Destination
Edit Destination:
a
b
*********************
2
Print List
[ Exit ]
1
Addressbook
Addressbook:
a
b
*********************
l
Fiala
l
Maury
[ Menu ]
k
Design
Menu:
a
b
1
Detail/Edit
2
Delete
*********************
3
Add Address
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-140
7Press the OK key. Add Address appears.
8Press the U or V key to select [Group].
9Press the OK key. This displays the screen for
editing groups.
NOTE: If the maximum number of groups has already
been registered, the screen will display Registered
numbers exceeded. and return to the Address Book.
10
Enter each item and then press the OK key.
Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Address Book list screen.
Refer to the descriptions below for how to enter
each item.
Entering Group Name
1Press the Y or Z key to display Group Name.
2Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry
screen appears.
3Enter the group name.
If creating a new group name, the address number
allocated to the destination is already entered.
4 Press the OK key. The group name is registered.
Add Address:
a
b
1
Contact
*********************
2
Group
Detail:
C
b
Group Name: 1/4
GUI Section
[ Edit ]
Detail:
C
b
Group Name: 1/4
GUI Section
[ Edit ]
Group Name:
A
b
GUI
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-141
8
Entering Group Member
1Press the Y or Z key to display Group Member.
2Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). This displays
the list of destinations registered to the group.
3Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group
editing menu appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Add Member].
5Press the OK key. This displays the list of
destinations registered in the Address Book.
NOTE: If 100 members have already been registered
in the group, the screen will display Registered
numbers exceeded. and return to the Group Member.
6Press the U or V key to select the destination you
want to add to the group.
7Press the OK key. This displays the sending
address registered to the selected destination.
8Press the U or V key to select the sending
address.
9Press the OK key.
10 Press the Back key to retuen to the Detail.
Detail:
C
b
Group Member: 2/4
30
[ Edit ]
Group Member:
a
b
*********************
b
Morgan
G
Morgan
[ Menu ]
p
Sally
Menu:
a
b
1
Detail
2
Delete
*********************
3
Add Member
Contacts:
a
b
*********************
l
Maury
l
Morgan
[ Menu ]
l
Fiala
l
Sally:
a
b
b
0667643277
p
sally@kyoceramita.
N
Ntid7004
[ Menu ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-142
11 Use the Y or Z key to check if the group was set
correctly.
12 Press the OK key. The group is added to the
Address Book.
NOTE: If you select an individual destination that has
already been registered to the group, the screen will
display This address is already registered. and return
to the screen of step 7.
Deleting member from group
To delete a member registered to the group, follow the procedure below.
1While Group Member is displayed, press [Edit] (the
Right Select key). This displays the list of
destinations registered to the group.
2Press the U or V key to select the destination you
want to delete.
3Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). The group
editing menu appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Delete].
5Press the OK key. A confirmation message
appears.
6Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Completed. is
displayed and the screen returns to Group
Member.
Entering Address Number
Address Number is an ID for a destination. When creating a new destination, the smallest unused address
number is automatically allocated. You can select any available number out of 100 numbers for individuals and
20 numbers for groups.
Group Member:
a
b
*********************
b
Morgan
Morgan
[ Menu ]
p
Sally
Menu:
a
b
1
Detail
*********************
3
Add Member
2
Delete
Delete.
Are you sure?
z
p
Sally
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-143
8
1Press the Y or Z key to display Address Number.
2Press [Edit] (the Right Select key). An entry
screen appears.
3Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to enter
the address number.
4Press the OK key. The address number is
registered.
NOTE: If you enter an address number that is already
registered, the screen will display This address
number is already registered. and return to the screen
of step 2.
Editing a Destination
Edit/delete the destinations (individuals) you added to the Address Book.
Use the procedure below to edit a destination.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [Edit Destination].
2Press the OK key. The Edit Destination menu
appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Address Book].
Detail:
C
b
Address Number: 4/4
019
[ Edit ]
Address Number:
D
b
(001 - 120)
*****053*
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
;
Document Box
*********************
=
Adjust/Maint.
[ Exit ]
<
Edit Destination
Edit Destination:
a
b
*********************
2
Print List
[ Exit ]
1
Addressbook
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-144
4Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select the destination you
want to edit.
6Press [Menu] (the Right Select key). Menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Detail/Edit].
8Press the OK key. This displays the screen for
editing the selected destination.
The screen shown is the one when an individual's
destination is selected.
9Edit items as necessary.
For how to edit each item, refer to Adding an
Individual Destination on page 8-133 and Adding a
Group on page 8-139.
10 After completing editing, press the OK key. A
confirmation screen appears.
11 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). Registered. is
displayed and the screen returns to the Address
Book list screen.
Addressbook:
a
b
*********************
l
Fiala
l
Maury
[ Menu ]
k
Design
Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Delete
3
Add Address
4
Search(Name)
1
Detail Rdit
Detail:
A
b
Contact name 1/7
Sally
[ Edit ]
Overwrite.
Are you sure?
z
p
Sally
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-145
8
Adding a Destination on One-touch Key
This machine has 11 one-touch keys and you can register 2 destinations to each of them.
The one-touch keys are arranged as shown below:
NOTE: Refer to One-Touch Key on page 3-3 for how to use them.
Registering new destination
Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One-touch key.
1In the basic screen, press the one-touch key to
which you want to register the destination and hold
it (2 seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears.
The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is
pressed and held.
2Press the U or V key to select the key number to
which you want to register the destination.
3Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select the destination you
want to register.
NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book,
refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-45.
5Press the OK key. The selected destination is
registered to the one-touch key. Registered. is
displayed and the screen returns to the basic
screen.
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4
No.12 No.13 No.14 No.15
No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8
No.16 No.17 No.18 No.19
No.9 No.10 No.11 SHIFT
No.20 No.21 No.22
Select Key No.:
a
b
*********************
2
No. 12
[ Exit ]
1
No. 1
Addressbook:
a
b
*********************
l
Fiala
l
Maury
[ Menu ]
k
Design
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-146
Editing One-touch Key
Edit/delete the destinations you added to One-touch Key.
Use the procedure below to edit the one-touch key.
1In the basic screen, press the one-touch key where
you want to edit the destination and hold it (2
seconds or longer). Select Key Set. appears.
The screen shown is the one when No.1/No.12 is
pressed and held.
2Press the U or V key to select the key number
where you want to edit the destination.
3Press the OK key. The Key Edit appears.
NOTE: If nothing is stored in a one-touch key, the key
edit screen will not appear; the address book screen
will appear instead. Go to step 6.
4Press the U or V key to select [Edit].
NOTE: If you select [Delete] here and press the OK
key, you can delete the registration of the destination.
If you press [Yes] (the Left Select key) in the screen
that appears, Completed. is displayed and the
registration of the destination is deleted.
5Press the OK key. The Address Book list screen
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the destination you
want to newly register.
NOTE: If you want to search from the Address Book,
refer to Search in Address Book on page 3-45.
Select Key No.:
a
b
*********************
2
No. 12
[ Exit ]
1
No. 1
Key Edit:
a
b
*********************
2
Detail
3
Delete
[ Exit ]
1
Edit
Addressbook:
a
b
*********************
l
Fiala
l
Maury
[ Menu ]
k
Design
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-147
8
7Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
8Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The selected
destination is registered to the one-touch key,
overwriting the previous one. Registered. is
displayed and the screen returns to the basic
screen.
Overwrite.
Are you sure?
z
No. 1
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-148
Restarting the System
Restart the machine without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by
the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
Use the procedure below to restart the system.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Restart].
4Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
5Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The machine is
restarted.
If you press [No] (the Right Select key), the
machine does not restart and the screen returns to
the System menu.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
3
Security Level
*********************
5
Op Functions
[ Exit ]
4
Restart
Restart.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-149
8
Network Setup
The following network settings are available.
• LAN Interface Setup …8-149
• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-150
• TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-150
• NetWare Setup …8-151
• AppleTalk Setup …8-153
• WSD Scan Setup …8-154
• WSD Print Setup …8-155
• Protocol Detail …8-157
LAN Interface Setup
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto.
Use the procedure below to select the interface.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
NetWare
3
AppleTalk
1
*TCP/IP Setting
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-150
5Press the U or V key to select [LAN Interface].
6Press the OK key. LAN Interface appears.
7Press the U or V key to select the desired LAN
interface.
The available LAN interfaces are as follows:
Auto
10Base-Half
10Base-Full
100Base-Half
100Base-Full
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Network Setting menu.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup
Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.
Refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-14 about the procedures.
TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup
Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default setting is Off.
Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv6) setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
LAN Interface:
a
b
*********************
2
10Base-Half
3
10Base-Full
1
*Auto
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-151
8
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
6Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [IPv6 Setting].
8Press the OK key. IPv6 Setting appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the TCP/IP Settings menu.
NetWare Setup
Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network from Auto,
Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP. The default settings is "Off".
Use the procedure below to setup the NetWare setting.
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
NetWare
3
AppleTalk
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP Settings
TCP/IP Settings:
a
b
*********************
2
IPv4 Setting
3
IPv6 Setting
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP
IPv6 Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
On
[ Exit ]
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-152
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [NetWare].
6Press the OK key. NetWare appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
If you select [On] and press the OK key, Frame
Type appears. Press the U or V key to select the
desired frame type.
The available frame types are as follows:
Auto
802.3
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
NetWare
3
AppleTalk
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP Settings
NetWare:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Frame Type:
a
b
*********************
2
802.3
3
Ether-II
1
*Auto
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-153
8
Ether-II
802.2
SNAP
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Network Setting menu.
For detailed information on restarting the system,
refer to Restarting the System on page 8-148.
AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On.
Use the procedure below to setup the AppleTalk setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [AppleTalk].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
NetWare
3
AppleTalk
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP Settings
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-154
6Press the OK key. AppleTalk appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off] and
then press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Network Setting menu.
WSD Scan Setup
Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On.
Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-SCAN setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is
changed.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
AppleTalk
a
b
1
Off
*********************
2
*On
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
NetWare
3
AppleTalk
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP Settings
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-155
8
5Press the U or V key to select [WSD-SCAN].
6Press the OK key. The WSD-SCAN menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Network Settings menu.
WSD Print Setup
Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On.
Use the procedure below to setup the WSD-PRINT setting. The machine must be restarted after the setting is
changed.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
WSD-SCAN:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-156
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [WSD-PRINT].
6Press the OK key. The WSD-PRINT menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Network Settings menu.
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
NetWare
3
AppleTalk
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP Settings
WSD-PRINT:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-157
8
Protocol Detail
Make other network related settings.
Item Description Default Setting Restarting the
System*
NetBEUI Selects whether or not to
receive documents using
NetBEUI.
On ×
LPD Select whether or not to
receive documents using
LPD as the network
protocol.
On z
FTP (Server) Select whether or not to
receive documents using
FTP.
On z
FTP (Client) Select whether or not to
send documents using FTP,
and the number of the port
to be used.
On
Port number: 21 ×
Raw Port Select whether or not to
receive documents using
Raw Port.
On z
LDAP Select whether or not to use
LDAP. Off ×
SNMP Select whether or not to
communicate using SNMP. On z
SNMPv3 Set SNMPv3. Off z
SMB Select whether or not to
send documents using
SMB, and the number of the
port to be used.
On
Port number:
139
×
SMTP
(E-mail TX) Select whether or not to
send e-mail using SMTP. Off ×
POP3
(E-mail RX) Select whether or not to
receive e-mail using POP3. Off ×
HTTP Select whether or not to
communicate using HTTP. On z
HTTPS Select whether or not to
communicate using HTTPS.
SSL must be set to [On] in
SSL Setting on page 8-160.
On z
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-158
Use the procedure below.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
IPP Select whether or not to use
IPP, and the number of the
port to be used.
Off
Port number:
631
z
IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use
IPP over SSL.
SSL must be set to [On] in
SSL Setting on page 8-160.
On z
ThinPrint Select whether or not to use
ThinPrint. Off ×
ThinPrintOverSSL
Select whether or not to use
ThinPrintOverSSL.
SSL must be set to [On] in
SSL Setting on page 8-160.
Off z
*z: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.
×: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.
Item Description Default Setting Restarting the
System*
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-159
8
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [TCP/IP Settings].
6Press the OK key. The TCP/IP Settings menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Protocol Detail].
8Press the OK key. The Protocol Detail menu
appears.
9Press the U or V key to select the item for which
you want to make settings.
10 Press the OK key. This displays the setting screen
for the item selected in step 9.
The screen shown is the one when [FTP(Client)] is
selected.
11 Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
If you select [On] for each of [FTP(Client)] and
[IPP] and press the OK key, a port number entry
screen appears.
Press the U or V key or the numeric keys to set
the port number.
12 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Protocol Detail menu.
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
NetWare
3
AppleTalk
[ Exit ]
1
TCP/IP Settings
TCP/IP Settings:
a
b
2
IPv4 Setting
3
IPv6 Setting
*********************
[ Exit ]
4
Protocol Detail
Protocol Detail:
a
b
*********************
2
SNMPv3
3
FTP(Server)
[ Exit ]
1
NetBEUI
FTP(Client)
:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Port Number
:
D
b
(1 - 65535)
*******21*
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-160
Network Security
The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data.
The following network security settings are available.
• SSL Setting …8-160
• SNMPv3 Setting …8-165
• IPSec Setting …8-166
SSL Setting
This allows you to use SSL network security for communication. You can use SSL Setup to select whether or
not SSL is used and to specify the IPP port and HTTP port security settings.
SSL
Make this setting Make this setting when you use SSL. The default setting is Off.
Use the procedure below to make the setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-161
8
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol].
6Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [SSL].
8Press the OK key. SSL appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.
IPP Security
Specify the protocol to be used for IPP. The default setting is IPP/IPP over SSL.
Use the procedure below to make the setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
8
Host Name
9
LAN Interface
[ Exit ]
7
Secure Protocol
Secure Protocol:
a
b
*********************
2
IPP Security
3
HTTP Security
[ Exit ]
1
SSL
SSL:
a
b
*********************
2
On
[ Exit ]
1
*Off
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-162
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol].
6Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [IPP Security].
8Press the OK key. IPP Security appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [IPP/IPP over SSL]
or [IPPoverSSL only].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.
HTTP Security
Specify the protocol to be used for HTTP. The default setting is HTTPS only.
Use the procedure below to make the setting.
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
8
Host Name
9
LAN Interface
[ Exit ]
7
Secure Protocol
Secure Protocol:
a
b
1
SSL
*********************
3
HTTP Security
[ Exit ]
2
IPP Security
IPP Security:
a
b
1
IPP/IPP over SSL
*********************
2
*IPPoverSSL only
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-163
8
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol].
6Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [HTTP Security].
8Press the OK key. HTTP Security appears.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
8
Host Name
9
LAN Interface
[ Exit ]
7
Secure Protocol
Secure Protocol:
a
b
1
SSL
2
IPP Security
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
HTTP Security
HTTP Security:
a
b
1
HTTP/HTTPS
*********************
2
*HTTPS only
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-164
9Press the U or V key to select [HTTP/HTTPS] or
[HTTPS only].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.
LDAP Security
Specify the protocol to be used for LDAP. The default setting is Off.
Use the procedure below to make the setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Secure Protocol].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
*********************
8
Host Name
9
LAN Interface
[ Exit ]
7
Secure Protocol
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-165
8
6Press the OK key. Secure Protocol appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [LDAP Security].
8Press the OK key. LDAP Security appears.
9Press the U or V key to select [Off], [LDAPv3/
TLS] or [LDAP over SSL].
10 Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Secure Protocol menu.
SNMPv3 Setting
Sets up SNMPv3. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below.
Refer to Protocol Detail on page 8-157 about the procedures.
Secure Protocol:
a
b
2
IPP Security
3
HTTP Security
*********************
[ Exit ]
4
LDAP Security
LDAP Security:
a
b
*********************
2
LDAPv3/TLS
3
LDAP over SSL
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-166
IPSec Setting
Make this setting when you use IPSec. The default setting is On and that of Rule Setting is also Off.
Use the procedure below to make the setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Network Setting].
4Press the OK key. The Network Setting menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [IPSec].
6Press the OK key. IPSec appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Network Setting:
a
b
4
WSD-SCAN
5
WSD-PRINT
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
IPSec
IPSec:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-167
8
If you select [On] and press the OK key, Rule
Setting appears. Press the U or V key to select
[On] or [Off].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the Network Setting menu.
Rule Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-168
Interface Block Setting
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or
optional interfaces.
The following interface block settings are available:
• USB Host (USB memory slot setting)
• USB Device (USB interface setting)
• Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)
USB Host (USB memory slot setting)
This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set.].
4Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [USB Host].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
1
Network Setting
*********************
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
2
I/F Block Set.
I/F Block Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
USB Device
3
Option I/F1
[ Exit ]
1
USB Host
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-169
8
6Press the OK key. USB Host appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or
[Block].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the I/F Block Set. menu.
USB Device (USB interface setting)
This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set.].
4Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu
appears.
USB Host:
a
b
*********************
2
Block
1
*Unblock
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
1
Network Setting
*********************
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
2
I/F Block Set.
I/F Block Set.:
a
b
1
USB Host
*********************
3
Option I/F1
[ Exit ]
2
USB Device
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-170
5Press the U or V key to select [USB Device].
6Press the OK key. USB Device appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or
[Block].
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the System menu.
USB Device:
a
b
*********************
2
Block
1
*Unblock
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-171
8
Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)
This locks and protects the optional interface slot. The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System].
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [I/F Block Set.].
4Press the OK key. The I/F Block Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Option I/F 1] or
[Option I/F 2].
6Press the OK key. Option I/F appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Unblock] or
[Block].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
1
Network Setting
*********************
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
2
I/F Block Set.
I/F Block Set.:
a
b
1
USB Host
2
USB Device
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
Option I/F1
Option I/F1:
a
b
*********************
2
Block
1
*Unblock
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-172
8Press the OK key. Completed. is displayed and the
screen returns to the System menu.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-173
8
Security Level (Security Level setting)
The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There
is no need for customers to use this menu.
Default Setting (System Menu)
8-174
Optional Functions
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Op Functions
See Optional Function on page Appendix-4.
9-1
9 Maintenance
This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement.
• Cleaning ....................................................................... 9-2
• Toner Container Replacement...................................... 9-4
• Replacing the Waste Toner Box ...................................9-6
Maintenance
9-2
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.
CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Glass Platen
Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild
detergent.
IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic
solvents.
Document Processor
If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the document processor, clean the slit glass with the
supplied cleaning cloth. The message Clean the slit glass. may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning.
NOTE: Wipe the slit glasses with the dry cloth. Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.
1Open the document processor and wipe the slit
glass (a).
2Wipe the white guide (b) on the document
processor.
3
Close the document processor.
a
b
Maintenance
9-3
9
Cleaning the paper transfer unit
CAUTION: Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
The paper transfer unit should be cleaned each time the toner container and waste toner box are replaced. To
maintain optimum print quality, it is also recommended that the inside of the machine be cleaned once a month
as well as when the toner container is replaced. It should also be cleaned if streaking or lines appear on printed
copies, or if printouts appear faint or blurred.
1Pull up the rear cover lever and open the rear
cover.
2Wipe away the paper dust on the registration roller and the paper ramp using the cloth.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to touch the black transfer roller and black transfer belt during cleaning as this may
adversely affect print quality.
3Close the rear cover.
Transfer Roller (Black)
Paper Transfer Unit
Registration Roller (Metal)
Transfer Belt (Black)
Duplex Unit
Paper Ramp
Maintenance
9-4
Toner Container Replacement
When the message display displays Add toner, replace the toner.
Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. For details, refer to
Cleaning the paper transfer unit on page 9-3.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may
cause burns.
Toner Container Replacement
1While pulling the top tray cover lever, open the top
tray.
CAUTION: To prevent toppling, the top tray and
document processor cannot be opened at the same
time.
Open the upper tray to the position shown. If the
tray is not opened to this position, it will not be
possible to install the toner container.
2Carefully remove the old toner container from the
machine.
NOTE: Put the old toner container in the plastic bag
(supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later
according to the local code or regulations for waste
disposal.
3Take the new toner container out of the toner kit.
Shake the new toner container at least 5 or 6 times
as shown in the figure in order to distribute the
toner evenly inside the container.
Maintenance
9-5
9
4Make sure the release lever is in the release
position and set the new toner container in the
machine.
5Push down on the top of the toner container to
install it firmly in place.
6Close the top tray.
When closing the top tray, do not press hard on the
operation panel.
NOTE: When closing the top tray, take care not to
pinch your fingers.
Maintenance
9-6
Replacing the Waste Toner Box
Replace the waste toner box when the Check waste toner box message is displayed. A new waste toner box is
included with the toner kit. The waste toner box needs to be replaced before the machine will operate.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may
cause burns.
Replacing the Waste Toner Box
1Open the waste toner cover.
2Press the lock button and gently remove the waste
toner box.
NOTE: Remove the waste toner box as gently as
possible so as not to scatter the toner inside. Do not let
the opening of the waste toner box face downward.
3Close the cap to the old waste toner box after
removing the box from the machine.
NOTE: Put the old waste toner box in the plastic bag
(supplied with the new toner kit) and discard it later
according to the local code or regulations for waste
disposal.
Old Waste
Toner Box
Maintenance
9-7
9
4Open the cap of the new waste toner box.
5Insert the new waste toner box as shown in the
figure. When the box is set correctly, it will snap
into place.
6Make sure that the waste toner box is correctly
inserted and close the waste toner cover.
After replacing the toner containers and the waste
toner box, clean the paper transfer unit. For
instructions, refer to Cleaning on page 9-2.
New Waste
Toner Box
Maintenance
9-8
Prolonged Non-Use and Moving of the Machine
Prolonged Non-use
If you ever leave the machine unused for a long period of time, remove the power cord from the wall outlet.
We recommend you consult with your dealer about the additional actions you should take to avoid possible
damage that may occur when the machine is used next time.
Moving the Machine
When you move the machine:
• Move it gently.
• Keep it as level as possible to avoid spilling toner inside the machine.
• Be sure to consult a service technician before attempting long distance transportation of the machine.
• Lock the lock lever for the optical system.
• Remove the toner container and waster toner box and put them in a plastic bag.
• Pull the release lever forward until it stops.
WARNING: If you ship the machine, remove and pack the toner container and the waste toner box in a plastic
bag and ship them separately from the machine.
10-1
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine.
• Solving Malfunctions...................................................10-2
• Responding to Error Messages.................................. 10-7
• Responding to an ATTENTION Indicator Flashes....10-15
• Clearing Paper Jams................................................ 10-16
Troubleshooting
10-2
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the
following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
The operation panel
does not respond
when the main power
switch is turned on.
Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC
outlet. —
Pressing the Start key
does not produce
copies.
Is there a message on the
Message Display? Determine appropriate response to
the message and respond
accordingly.
—
Is the machine in Sleep
mode? Press the Power key to recover
the machine from Sleep mode. The
machine will be ready to copy
within 20 seconds.
2-9
Blank sheets are
ejected. Are the originals loaded
correctly? When placing originals on the
platen, place them face-down and
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
2-43
When placing originals in the
document processor, place them
face-up.
2-45
— Check that the application software
is correctly operated. —
Faint or blurred
printing Is the machine in Auto
Density mode? Set the correct density level for
auto density. —
Is the machine in Manual
Density mode? Select the correct density level. 5-16
When changing the default density
level, adjust the density manually
and choose the desired level.
—
Is the toner distributed evenly
within the toner container? Shake the toner container from
side to side about several times. 9-4
Is there a message indicating
the addition of toner? Replace the toner container. 9-4
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-26
Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable EcoPrint mode. 4-10
— Make sure the paper type setting is
correct the paper being used. 8-13
8-15
Troubleshooting
10-3
10
— Conduct color calibration either by
switching the machine off then on
or using the operation panel.
8-103
— Try adjusting the color control
settings using the printer driver. —
— Run [MC] and decrease the
adjustment value. Decrease the
adjustment value 1 level at a time
from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
decreased by 1 level, decrease by
1 level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to
the original value.
8-115
Printouts are too dark. Is the machine in Auto
Density mode? Set the correct density level for
auto density. —
Is the machine in Manual
Density mode? Select the correct density level. 5-16
When changing the default density
level, adjust the density manually
and choose the desired level.
—
Copies have a moire
pattern (dots grouped
together in patterns
and not aligned
uniformly).
Is the original a printed
photograph? Set the image quality to [Photo]. 5-15
Printouts are not
clear. Did you choose appropriate
image quality for the original? Select appropriate image quality. 5-15
Printouts are dirty. Is the platen or the document
processor dirty? Clean the platen or the document
processor. —
Printouts are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in
very humid conditions? Use in a location that has suitable
humidity. —
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-4
Images are skewed. Are the originals placed
correctly? When placing originals on the
platen, align them with the original
size indicator plates.
2-43
When placing originals in the
document processor, align the
original width guides securely
before placing the originals.
2-44
Is the paper loaded
correctly? Check the position of the paper
width guides. 2-44
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded
correctly? Load the paper correctly. 2-26
Is the paper of the supported
type? Is it in good condition? Remove the paper, turn it over, and
reload it. 2-26
Is the paper curled, folded or
wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-26
Are there any loose scraps or
jammed paper in the
machine?
Remove any jammed paper. 10-16
Printouts are
wrinkled. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-26
Is the paper set in a proper
orientation? Change the orientation in which the
paper is positioned. —
Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC
outlet. —
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. 2-7
Is the printer cable or
network cable connected? Connect the correct printer cable or
network cable securely. 2-5
Was the machine powered
on before the printer cable
was connected?
Power on the machine after
connecting the printer cable. 2-5
2-7
Is the print job paused? Press [Resume] (the Left Select
key) to resume printing. 7-18
Documents are
printed improperly. Are the application software
settings at the PC set
properly?
Check that the printer driver and
application software settings are
set properly.
—
While the operation
panel was being used,
the keys locked up
and do not respond
when pressed.
Is the operation panel
locked? Check the panel lock setting in
COMMAND CENTER and change
the setting if necessary.
KYOCERA
COMMAND
CENTER
Operation
Guide
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-5
10
Cannot print with USB
memory. Is the USB host blocked? Select Unblock in the USB host
settings. 8-168
Check that the USB memory
is securely plugged into the
machine.
——
When displaying an
image sent from the
machine on the PC, an
image size is shrunk
vertically or
horizontally.
Have you selected
200×100dpi Normal or
200×400dpi Super Fine for
the scan resolution?
Select a scan resolution other than
200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi
Super Fine when sending an
image.
5-18
USB memory not
recognized. Check that the USB memory
is securely plugged into the
machine.
——
Is the USB host blocked? Select Unblock in the USB host
settings. 8-168
Skewed-color printout — Conduct color registration using
the operation panel. 8-103
Black or white vertical
streaks Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. 9-2
Check the operation panel
for toner. If the “Toner is running out.
C, M, Y, K” message is displayed
with color description, install a new
toner kit for the color.
9-4
— Run [LaserScanner Cln]. 8-112
— Run [Drum Refresh]. 8-113
Grey background — Conduct color calibration either by
switching the machine off then on
or using the operation panel.
8-103
Dirt on the top edge or
back of the paper Check the paper chute and
the ramp. Open the rear cover and check for
toner on the paper ramp inside the
paper transfer unit. Clean the
paper ramp using a soft, dry, lint-
free cloth.
9-3
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-6
Offset occures. — Run [Drum Refresh]. 8-113
— Run [MC] and decrease the
adjustment value. Decrease the
adjustment value 1 level at a time
from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
decreased by 1 level, decrease by
1 level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to
the original value.
8-115
Part of the image is
periodically faint or
blurred.
— Run [MC] and decrease the
adjustment value. Decrease the
adjustment value 1 level at a time
from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
decreased by 1 level, decrease by
1 level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to
the original value.
8-115
Irregular horizontal
lines appear in the
image.
— Run [MC] and decrease the
adjustment value. Decrease the
adjustment value 1 level at a time
from the current value. If there is
no improvement after the value is
decreased by 1 level, decrease by
1 level again. If there is still no
improvement, return the setting to
the original value.
8-115
The altitude is 1500 m
or higher and irregular
horizontal white lines
appear in the image.
— Run [Altitude Adj.] and set the
adjustment value to [High 1]. If
there is no improvement when the
value is set to [High 1], set to [High
2].
8-114
The altitude is 1500 m
or higher and dots
appear in the image.
— Run [Altitude Adj.] and set the
adjustment value to [High 1]. If
there is no improvement when the
value is set to [High 1], set to [High
2].
8-114
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-7
10
Responding to Error Messages
If the control panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the
following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Alphanumeric
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Load paper in cassette
1. Is the indicated cassette out
of paper? Load paper. 2-27
Load paper in MP
Tray. Is the paper of the selected
size loaded in the multi
purpose tray?
Load the paper in the multi purpose
tray which is of the size and type
indicated on the Message Display.
2-29
Toner is running out.
[C], [M], [Y], [K] – It is almost time to replace the toner
container. After a certain number of
pages (about 20) are printed, printing
will stop. Obtain a new toner
container of the color indicated in [].
9-4
Add toner.
[C], [M], [Y], [K]
Replace the toner container. Replace
with a toner container of the color
indicated in [].
9-4
Check waste toner
box. Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. 9-6
Is the waste toner box
installed? Install the waste toner box in the
machine. 9-6
Cannot connect to
Authentication Server. – Press the OK key and check the
following items:
• Registration to Authentication
Server
• Password and computer address
for Authentication Server
• Connection of Network
—
Cannot duplex print
on this paper. Did you select a paper size/
media type that cannot be
duplex printed?
Select the available paper type.
Press the OK key to print without
using Duplex.
3-16
Incorrect account ID.
Job is canceled. – This job is canceled because it is
restricted by Job Accounting. Press
the OK key.
—
Close top (rear or left)
cover. Is there any cover which is
open? Close the cover indicated on the
control panel. —
Close Document
Processor. Is the document processor
open? Close the document processor. —
Is the top cover of the
document processor open? Close the top cover of the document
processor. 2-44
Troubleshooting
10-8
Job Accounting
restriction exceeded.
Cannot print.
– The job is canceled. Press the OK
key. —
Job Accounting
restriction exceeded.
Cannot scan.
– The job is canceled. Press the OK
key. —
Polling
box limit exceeded. – FAX box is full, and no further storage
is available. The job is canceled.
Press the OK key.
—
Incorrect Login User
Name or Password.
Job Is canceled.
– Enter correct Login User Name or
Login Password. —
Job Accounting
restriction exceeded.
Job is canceled.
Is the acceptable printing
count restricted by Job
Accounting exceeded?
The printing count exceeded the
acceptable count restricted by Job
Accounting. Cannot print any more.
This job is canceled. Press the OK
key.
—
Machine failure.
Call service. – Internal error has occurred. Make a
note of the error code displayed on
the Message Display. Turn off the
machine, unplug the power cord, and
contact your Service Representative.
—
Is Error code "4201 to 4204"
displayed? Internal condensation has occurred
as a result of a sudden change in
temperature. Turn off the machine
and let stand for 30 to 90 minutes,
and then back on again. If this
message still remains, turn off the
machine, unplug the power cord, and
contact your Service Representative.
—
Memory is full.
Print job cannot be
processed
completely.
– Unable to continue the job as the
memory is used up.
Press the OK key to print the
scanned pages. The print job cannot
be processed completely.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key
and press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-9
10
Memory is full.
Job is canceled. – Unable to continue the job as the
memory is used up. Press the OK
key. To print the same originals,
follow the operations below.
• Select [Photo] for the quality of
copies.
• Select a nagative value for the
sharpness.
• Select the paper size smaller to
reduce.
If it is not resolved, expand the printer
memory.
—
Paper jammed. – If a paper jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the Message
Display. Leave the machine on and
follow the instruction to remove the
jammed paper.
10-16
Job not stored.
Press [OK]. – Press the OK key to cancel storing.
USB memory error.
Job is canceled. – This job is canceled. Press the OK
key. —
Place original
and press Start key. – Remove originals from the document
processor, put them back in their
original order, and place them again.
Press the Start key to resume
printing.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key
and press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
2-45
Remove original from
document processor. Are there any originals left in
the document processor? Remove originals from the document
processor. —
Maximum Number of
scanned pages.
Job is canceled.
– Scanning cannot be performed due
to insufficient memory of scanner.
The job is canceled. Press the OK
key.
—
Is the acceptable scanning
count exceeded? Press the OK key to print, send or
store the scanned pages. Press the
Status/Job Cancel key and press
[Cancel] to cancel the job.
—
Error occurred.
Turn the main power
switch off and on.
– System error has occurred. Turn the
main power switch off and on. —
Incorrect account ID. – The Account ID does not match.
Check the registered Account ID. —
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-10
File is not found. – The specified file is not found. The
job is canceled. Press the OK key. —
Top tray is full of
Paper.
Remove the paper.
– Remove paper from the top tray, and
press the OK key to resume the job. —
Unknown toner
Installed. – If the toner container was taken from
a different machine of the same
model while it was displaying the Add
toner. message, ignore the message
and use the toner.
—
Unknown toner
Installed. PC – This message is displayed if the
installed toner container's regional
specification does not match the
machine's.
Insufficient memory.
Cannot start the job – Further scanning cannot be
performed due to insufficient memory.
Press the OK key to print the
scanned pages. Press the Status/
Job Cancel key and press [Cancel]
to cancel the job.
—
Replace MK. – Replacement of the parts in the
maintenance kit is necessary at every
200,000 pages of printing and
requires professional servicing.
Contact your service technician.
—
Send error.
#### – An error has occurred during
transmission. The possible error
codes and their descriptions are as
follows.
—
Scan to SMB Error Code
Error Code:1101 Is the host name of the SMB
server incorrect? Set the correct host name in
COMMAND CENTER. —
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-11
10
Error Code:1102 Is a domain name entered? Correctly enter the user name in the
"domain\user", "domain\user" or
"domain@user" format.
—
Did you specify an invalid
user or password? Enter the correct user name and
password. —
Did you specify an invalid
folder name or share name? Enter the correct folder name and
share name. —
Did you specify a user who
is not allowed to access the
folder, or has access
permission been set for the
folder?
Check the access restrictions of the
destination folder. —
Are prohibited characters
included in the host name? Check if any of the following
characters are included in the host
name.
` ~ ! @ # $ ^ & * ( ) = + [ ] { } \ | ; : ' " <
> / ?
—
Error Code:1103 Is a domain name entered? Correctly enter the user name in the
"domain\user", "domain\user" or
"domain@user" format.
—
Is the correct folder path
entered? Enter the correct folder path. —
Did you specify a user who
is not allowed to access the
folder, or has access
permission been set for the
folder?
Check the access restrictions of the
destination folder. —
Error Code:1105 Is SMB protocol enabled? Enable SMB protocol for the host
name in COMMAND CENTER. —
Error Code:2101,
2201, 2203 Did you enter an invalid host
name or IP address? Enter the correct host name or IP
address. —
Is the wrong port number
specified? Specify the correct port number. —
Are you correctly connected
to the network? Make sure that the network cable has
been correctly connected.
Make sure that the network
environment (server, hub, or other
LAN network) is operating correctly.
—
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-12
Error Code:0007,
5101, 5102, 5103, 5104,
7101, 720f
– Turn the main power switch off and
then on. If this occurs repeatedly,
write down the error code that
appears in the message display and
contact a service technician. (See the
procedure in Machine failure. Call
service.)
—
Error Code:9181 Have more than 999 original
pages been scanned? If there are more than 999 original
pages, send the pages in separate
batches.
—
Scan To FTP Error Code
Error Code:1101 Is the host name of the FTP
server incorrect? Set the correct host name in
COMMAND CENTER. —
Error Code:1102 Is a domain name entered? Correctly enter the user name in the
"domain\user" or "domain\user"
format.
—
Did you specify an invalid
user or password? Enter the correct user name and
password. —
Error Code:1103 Is the correct folder path
entered? Enter the correct folder path. —
Did you specify a user who
is not allowed to access the
folder, or has access
permission been set for the
folder?
Check the access restrictions of the
destination folder. —
Error Code:1105 Is FTP protocol enabled? Enable FTP protocol in COMMAND
CENTER. —
Error Code:1131 Is one of the FTPS settings
incorrect? Check the security settings. —
Error Code:1132 Are you trying to send to a
server that does not support
FTPS service or the
encryption method?
Check if the server supports FTPS.
Check if the server supports the
encryption method.
—
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-13
10
Error Code:2101,
2102, 2103, 2201, 2202,
2203, 2231, 3101
Did you enter an invalid host
name or IP address? Enter the correct host name or IP
address. —
Is the wrong port number
specified? Specify the correct port number. —
Are you correctly connected
to the network? Make sure that the network cable has
been correctly connected.
Make sure that the network
environment (server, hub, or other
LAN network) is operating correctly.
—
Error Code:4701,
5101, 5102, 5103, 5104,
7102, 720f
– Turn the main power switch off and
then on. If this occurs repeatedly,
write down the error code that
appears in the message display and
contact a service technician. (See the
procedure in Machine failure. Call
service.)
—
Error Code:9181 Have more than 999 original
pages been scanned? If there are more than 999 original
pages, send the pages in separate
batches.
—
Scan To Email Error Code
Error Code:1101 Is the SMTP/POP3 server
name incorrect? Set the correct server name in
COMMAND CENTER. —
Error Code:1102 Did you specify an invalid
user or password? Enter the correct user name and
password. —
Error Code:1104 Did you specify the
destination address? Specify the destination address. —
Error Code:1105 Is SMTP protocol enabled? Enable SMTP protocol in COMMAND
CENTER. —
Error Code:2101,
2102, 2103, 2201, 2202,
2203
Is "Other Authenticate"
selected when POP before
SMTP authentication is
performed?
Select a valid POP3 user other than
"Other". —
Is the specified server an
SMTP server? Set the correct server name in
COMMAND CENTER. —
Are you correctly connected
to the network? Make sure that the network cable has
been correctly connected.
Make sure that the network
environment (server, hub, or other
LAN network) is operating correctly.
—
Error Code:2204 Were you attempting to
send too much data? Change the size that can be sent in
COMMAND CENTER. —
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-14
Error Code:3101 Is the server operating
correctly? Make sure that the network
environment (server, hub, or other
LAN network) is operating correctly.
—
Is an authentication method
set for which the server
cannot respond normally?
Check the settings on the server and
client. (For example, make sure the
SMTP/POP authentication enable/
disable settings are the same on the
server and on the client.)
—
Error Code:3201 Is a non-supported SMTP
authentication method
enabled?
Check the SMTP authentication
settings on the server and client. The
SMTP authentication methods below
can be used on the machine.
CRAM-MD5 / DIGEST-MD5 / PLAIN /
LOGIN
—
Error Code:4201,
5101, 5102, 5103, 5104,
7101, 7102, 720f
– Turn the main power switch off and
then on. If this occurs repeatedly,
write down the error code that
appears in the message display and
contact a service technician. (See the
procedure in Machine failure. Call
service.)
—
Error Code:9181 Have more than 999 original
pages been scanned? If there are more than 999 original
pages, send the pages in separate
batches.
—
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Troubleshooting
10-15
10
Responding to an ATTENTION Indicator Flashes
If an ATTENTION indicator flashes, press [Status/Job Cancel] to check an error message. If the message is not
indicated on the Message Display when [Status/Job Cancel] is pressed or the ATTENTION indicator flashes,
check the following.
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page
Cannot send fax. Is the modular cord
connected correctly? Connect the modular
cord correctly. —
Is Permitted FAX No. or
Permitted ID No.
registered correctly?
Check Permitted FAX
No. and Permitted ID
No..
FAX Operation Guide
Chapter 6 Transmission
Restriction
Has a communication
error occurred? Check error codes in the
TX/RX Result Report
and Activity Report. If
the error code starts with
"U" or "E", perform the
corresponding
procedure.
FAX Operation Guide
Appendix
"Error Code List"
Is the destination FAX
line busy? Send again. —
Does the destination
FAX machine respond? Send again. —
Is there an error other
than above? Contact your Service
Representative. —
Troubleshooting
10-16
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, a message will be displayed about the jam and copying or printing will stop. Remove
jammed paper. After removing jammed paper, the machine will re-start printing.
Leave the main power switch on and to remove the jammed paper refer to the following information below.
Detailed paper jam positions are as follows. Refer to the indicated page number to remove the paper jam.
Paper jams
If paper jams occur frequently, the specifications of the paper may not be suitable for the machine. Try changing
the paper type. For paper specifications, see "Paper Specifications" in the Appendix. If paper jams still occur
frequently even though you have changed the paper, the machine may have a problem. Please contact your
service representative.
IMPORTANT: When removing a paper jam, make sure that no torn pieces of paper remain in the machine.
Paper Jam
Location Description Reference
Page
APaper jam in the multi purpose tray. 10-16
BPaper jam in the machine cassette, or in a cassette of the optional
paper feeder. 10-18
CPaper jam in the paper feeder. 10-19
DPaper jam in the transfer unit. 10-19
EPaper jam in the document processor. 10-20
Troubleshooting
10-17
10
Online Help Messages
The online Help message function of the machine will show the procedure for removing a paper jam in the
message display. When Paper Jam is displayed, press [Help](the Left Select key) to display the procedure to
clear the jam.
Press U to display the next step or press V to display the previous step. Press the OK key to exit the online
help message display.
When a paper jam occurs, you can use the online Help message to remove the paper jam.
Multi Purpose Tray
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the MP tray.
1Remove the paper jammed at the MP tray.
IMPORTANT: If the paper cannot be removed, do not
try to forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed
unit on page 10-19.
2Pull the cassette out of the machine.
3Open the lower feed cover.
Troubleshooting
10-18
4Remove any partially fed paper.
After you have removed the paper jam, replace the
lower feed cover.
5Replace the paper cassette in the machine.
Paper Cassette/Paper Feeder
In the event that a paper jam occurs in the paper cassette, follow the procedure below to remove the jam. Paper
jams in the cassette of the optional paper feeder are removed in the same way.
1Pull out the cassette or optional paper feeder.
2Remove any partially fed paper.
IMPORTANT: If the paper cannot be removed, do not
try to forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed
unit on page 10-19.
3Replace the paper cassette in the machine.
NOTE: If the paper is not loaded correctly, reload the paper.
Troubleshooting
10-19
10
Paper jam in the paper feeder
If the paper jam cannot be removed using the procedure in paper jam in the paper cassette on page 10-18,
open the rear cover of the paper feeder and remove the jammed paper.
NOTE: If the paper cannot be removed, do not try to
forcefully remove it. Go to paper jam in the feed unit on
page 10-19.
Inside the Machine
1Pull up the rear cover lever and open the rear
cover.
CAUTION: Some parts are very hot inside the machine. Exercise caution as there is a risk of burn injury.
2If most of the paper is out in the upper tray, grasp
the paper and pull it out.
3If a paper jam reaches the fuser unit as shown,
open the fuser cover, grasp the paper, and pull it
out.
Fuser
Cover
Troubleshooting
10-20
4If a paper jam does not reach the metal roller as
shown, grasp the paper and pull it out.
5If a paper jam has occurred inside the machine as
shown, open the rear feed cover and pull out the
paper.
6If a paper jam reaches the Duplex Unit as shown,
lift up the Duplex Unit and remove the paper.
7Close the rear cover. The error will be cleared and
printing will resume after warm-up.
Document Processor
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the document processor.
1Remove all of the originals from the document feed
tray.
Regis-
tration
Roller
Rear
Feed
Cover
Duplex
Unit
Troubleshooting
10-21
10
2Open the left cover of the document processor.
3Remove the jammed original.
If the original is caught in the rollers or difficult to
remove, proceed to the next step.
4Open the document processor.
5Remove the jammed original.
If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from
inside the machine.
6Close the document processor.
7Place the originals.
Troubleshooting
10-22
11-1
11 Management
This chapter explains the following operations.
• User Login Administration .......................................... 11-2
• Job Accounting......................................................... 11-13
• Checking the Counter............................................... 11-33
Management
11-2
User Login Administration
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct Login
User Name and Login Password for user authentication to log in.
Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified
only by the machine administrator.
First User Login Administration
Follow these steps for the first user login administration.
Enable user login administration. (page 11-3)
T
Add a user.(page 11-6)
T
Log out.(page 11-5)
T
The registered user logs in for operations.(page 11-5)
Displaying user control
1Press the system menu / counter key on the
operation panel.
If user control is disabled, the user authentication
screen appears. Enter the Login User Name and
Login Password, and press [Login]. In this case,
log in with administrator authority. For the default
Login User Name and Login Password, see
Adding a User on page 11-6.
NOTE: To enter text, see Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7.
The system/counter menu appears.
Login User Name
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
2
Counter
3
System
[ Exit ]
1
Report
Management
11-3
11
2From the system menu / counter menu, press the
U or V key to select [User/Job Account].
3Press the OK key. The User/Job Account menu
appears.
Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration
This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2Press the U or V key to select [User Login Set.].
3Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [User Login].
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
*********************
5
User Property
6
Common Settings
[ Exit ]
4
User/Job Account
Item Description
Local
Authentication User authentication based on user properties on
the local user list stored in the machine.
Network
Authentication User authentication based on Authentication
Server. Use a user property stored in
Authentication Server to access the network
authentication login page.
User/Job Account:
a
b
*********************
2
Job Account. Set.
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
1
User Login Set.
User Login Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Local User List
3
Group Auth.
[ Exit ]
1
User Login
Management
11-4
5Press the OK key. User Login appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [Local Authentic.]
or [Netwk Authentic.], and then press the OK key.
Select [Off] to disable user login administration.
When "Network Authentication" is selected, select
[NTLM], [Kerberos], or [Ext.] for the server type
and press the OK key.
If [NTLM] or [Kerberos] is selected for the server
type, enter the host name (up to 64 characters)
and domain name (up to 256 characters) of the
authentication server, and press the OK key.
If [Ext.] is selected for the server type, enter the
host name (up to 64 characters) and port number
of the authentication server, and press the OK key.
NOTE: If the Login User Name and Login Password are rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator registered in the local
user list and correct the settings. If the server type is [Kerberos], only domain names entered in uppercase will
be recognized.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the User Login Set. menu.
User Login:
a
b
1
*Off
*********************
3
Netwk Authentic.
2
Local Authentic.
Server type:
a
b
*********************
2
Kerberos
3
Ext.
1
NTLM
Host Name:
A
b
GUI
*
ABC
[ Text ]
Management
11-5
11
Login/Logout
Once you enable user login administration, a Login User Name and Login Password entry screen appears each
time you use this machine.
Login
Log in using the procedure below.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1If the screen below appears during the operations,
perform the following login operations.
2Press the OK key, enter the Login User Name, and
then press the OK key.
3Press the V key to select [Login Password], press
the OK key, enter the Login Password, and then
press the OK key.
4Check the Login User Name and Login Password
are correct, and press [Login] (the Right Select
key).
Logout
To log out the machine, press the Logout key to return
to the Login User Name/Login Password entry screen.
Auto Logout
Logout is automatically executed in the following cases:
• When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep
mode
• When auto sleep is activated
• When auto panel reset is activated
Login User Name
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Management
11-6
Adding a User
This adds a new user. You can add Up to 21 users (including the default Login User Name). The table below
explains the user information to be registered.
NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is
already stored. The following are the default user's properties.
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: 2600
Login Password: 2600
Access Level: Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, Login User Name and Login Password regularly for
your security.
Use the procedure below to register a new user.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1Log in as a user with administrator rights.
2See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
3In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [User Login Set.].
Item Description
User Name*
* Mandatory at user registration.
Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32
characters).
Login User
Name* Enter the Login User Name to log in (up to 32
characters). The same Login User Name cannot be
registered.
Login
Password* Enter the password to log in (up to 64 characters).
Access Level* Select Administrator or User for user access
privileges.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user,
who registered his/her account name, can log in
without entering the account ID. Refer to Job
Accounting on page 11-13.
E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The
registered address will be automatically selected
for subsequent operations that need any E-mail
function.
User/Job Account:
a
b
*********************
2
Job Account. Set.
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
1
User Login Set.
Management
11-7
11
4Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select [Local User List].
6Press the OK key. Local User List appears.
7Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the U
or V key to select [Add User], and then press the
OK key.
8
Enter the user name and press the OK key, enter
the Login User Name in the next screen, and then
press the OK key.
9
Press the U or V key to select [Exit] and then
press the OK key.
Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see
information of the registered users.
10
In Local User List, press the U or V key to select
the added user and then press the OK key.
User Login Set.:
a
b
1
User Login
*********************
3
IC Card Setting
[ Exit ]
2
Local User List
Local User List:
a
b
l
Admin
*********************
[ Menu ]
l
DeviceAdmin
Menu:
a
b
1
Detail/Edit
2
Delete
*********************
3
Add User
User Name:
T
b
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
l
User01:
a
b
*********************
2
Detail
1
Exit
Local User List:
a
b
l
DeviceAdmin
l
Admin
*********************
[ Menu ]
l
User 1
Management
11-8
11
Press the Y or Z key to select [Login Password:],
press [Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the Login
Password, and then press the OK key.
12
Enter the same Login Password to confirm and
press the OK key.
13
Press the Z key to select [E-mailAddress:], press
[Edit] (the Right Select key), enter the e-mail
address, and then press the OK key.
14
Press the Z key to select [Access Level:], press
[Change] (the Right Select key), select the user
access privilege, and then press the OK key.
NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator,
[Change] is not displayed.
15
Press the Z key to select [Account Name:], press
[Change] (the Right Select key), select the
account, and then press the OK key.
NOTE: If the user list is for device administrator and
the device administrator does not log in, [Change] is
not displayed.
16
After entering the user information, press the OK
key again.
Registered. is displayed and the screen returns to
Local User List.
Changing User Properties
User information can be changed. It can be changed only by a user with administrator privileges.
Use the procedure below to change the user properties.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
Detail:
C
b
Login Password: 3/6
OOOOOOOOOOO
[ Edit ]
Detail:
C
b
p
E-mailAddress: 4/6
******@abcdef.jp
[ Edit ]
Detail:
C
b
Access Level: 5/6
Administrator
[ Change ]
Detail:
C
b
Account Name: 6/6
k
KyoceramitaOsaka
[ Change ]
Management
11-9
11
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [User Login Set.].
3Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Local User List].
5Press the OK key. Local User List appears.
The procedure differs depending on the details to
be edited.
Changing user information
1Press the U or V key to select the user whose
information you want to change, and then press
the OK key.
2In the same fashion as registering a new user,
press the Y or Z key to select the desired item,
press [Edit] (the Right Select key), change
information, and then press the OK key.
3Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary.
4After completing changing the user information,
press the OK key again.
User/Job Account:
a
b
*********************
2
Job Account. Set.
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
1
User Login Set.
User Login Set.:
a
b
1
User Login
*********************
3
Group Auth.
[ Exit ]
2
Local User List
Local User List:
a
b
*********************
l
Admin
l
User1
[ Menu ]
l
DeviceAdmin
Local User List:
a
b
l
DeviceAdmin
*********************
l
User1
[ Menu ]
l
Admin
Detail:
C
b
User Name: 1/6
User1
[ Edit ]
Management
11-10
5The overwrite confirmation screen appears.
Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The user
information is changed and the screen returns to
Local User List.
Deleting a user
1Press the U or V key to select the user you want
to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right Select
key).
2Press the U or V key to select [Delete] and then
press the OK key.
3In the delete confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the
Left Select key). The user is deleted and the
screen returns to Local User List.
Enabling/Disabling Group Authentication
This enables group authentication using the LDAP server. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic.]
is selected as the user authentication method. For details of LDAP server settings, refer to the Operation Guide
of the LDAP server. This menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication
method.
Use the procedure below to enable group authentication.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
NOTE: You can configure detail settings of group authentication in COMMAND CENTER. For details, refer to
the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2Press the U or V key to select [User Login Set.].
3Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu
appears.
Local User List:
a
b
l
DeviceAdmin
*********************
l
User1
[ Menu ]
l
Admin
Menu:
a
b
1
Detail/Edit
*********************
3
Add User
2
Delete
User Login Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Local User List
3
Group Auth.
[ Exit ]
1
User Login
Management
11-11
11
4Press the U or V key to select [Group Auth.].
5Press the OK key. Group Auth. appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the User/Job Account menu.
Displaying Network User Property
Use the procedure below to display the property of the user logged on using the network authentication. This
menu can be used only when [Netwk Authentic.] is selected as the user authentication method.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2Press the U or V key to select [User Login Set.].
3Press the OK key. The User Login Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [NW User
Property].
5Press the OK key. NW User Property appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On] or [Off].
7Press the OK key.
Group Auth.:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
User Login Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Local User List
3
Group Auth.
[ Exit ]
1
User Login
NW User Property:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Management
11-12
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the User/Job Account menu.
Unknown login user name Job
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown Login User Name. If the User Login is set
to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown.
The table below shows the available settings.
Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Unknown ID Job].
3Press the OK key. Unknown ID Job appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Reject] or [Permit].
5Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the User/Job Account menu.
Item Description
Reject The job is rejected (not printed).
Permit The job is permitted to be printed.
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
2
Job Account. Set.
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
Unknown ID Job
Unknown ID Job:
a
b
*********************
2
Permit
1
*Reject
Management
11-13
11
Job Accounting
Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each
account.
Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.
• Manageability of up to 20 individual accounts.
• Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.
• Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.
• Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.
• Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
• Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.
First Job Accounting Setup
Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.
Enable job accounting. (page 11-13)
T
Add an account. (page 11-16)
T
Log out. (page 11-15)
T
Other users log in for operations. (page 11-15)
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting
Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting.
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Job Account. Set.].
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
*********************
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
2
Job Account.Set.
Management
11-14
3Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Job Accounting].
5Press the OK key. Job Accounting appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [On]. To disable job
accounting, select [Off].
7Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Job Account. Set. menu.
NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu
default screen, logout is automatically executed and
the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To
continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
Job Account.Set.:
a
b
*********************
2
Account. Report
3
Total Accounting
[ Exit ]
1
Job Accounting
Job Accounting:
a
b
*********************
2
On
1
*Off
Management
11-15
11
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Use the procedure below to login and logout.
Login
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1In the screen below, enter the account ID using the
numeric keys and press the OK key.
NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the
Clear key and enter the account ID again.
If the entered account ID does not match the registered
ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter
the correct account ID.
By pressing [Counter] (the Left Select key), you can
refer to the number of pages printed and the number of
pages scanned.
When the screen to enter the Login User Name and
Login Password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to
enter the Login User Name and Login Password
appears. Enter a Login User Name and Login
Password to log in. (Refer to Login/Logout on page 11-
5.) If the user has already registered the account
information, the account ID entry would be skipped.
(Refer to Adding a User on page 11-6.)
2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout
When the operations are complete, press the Logout
key to return to the account ID entry screen.
Account ID:
b
*******************
[Counter ]
Management
11-16
Adding an Account
This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required.
Use the procedure below to register a new account.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Account. List].
5Press the OK key. Account. List appears.
Item Description
Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits
(between 0 and 99999999).
Restriction This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the
number of sheets to load. Refer to Restricting the
Use of the Machine on page 11-20.
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
*********************
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
2
Job Account.Set.
Job Account.Set.:
a
b
4
Each Job Account
*********************
6
Default Setting
[ Exit ]
5
Account. List
Account. List:
a
b
*********************
k
Osaka GUI Design
k
Kyoceramita
[ Menu ]
k
UI R&D DEP.
Management
11-17
11
6Press [Menu] (the Right Select key), press the U
or V key to select [Add Account], and then press
the OK key.
7Enter the account name and press the OK key.
8
Enter the account code and press the OK key.
NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered
cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
9
Press the U or V key to select [Exit] and then
press the OK key.
Select [Detail] and press the OK key to see
information of the registered accounts.
10
Account. List is displayed and the new account is
added to the account list.
Managing Accounts
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.
Use the procedure below to manage accounts.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
Menu:
a
b
1
Detail/Edit
2
Delete
*********************
3
Add Account
Account Name:
T
b
*
S
ABC
[ Text ]
Account ID:
b
*******************
S
k
Dep.01:
a
b
*********************
2
Detail
1
Exit
Management
11-18
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Account. List].
5Press the OK key. Account. List appears.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be
edited.
Changing account information
1Press the U or V key to select the account whose
information you want to change, and then press
the OK key.
2Press the Y or Z key to select the item you want
to change, press [Edit] (the Right Select key),
change account information and restriction of use,
and then press the OK key.
NOTE: Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-20.
3Repeat step 2 to change items as necessary.
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
*********************
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
2
Job Account.Set.
Job Account.Set.:
a
b
4
Each Job Account
*********************
6
Default Setting
[ Exit ]
5
Account. List
Account. List:
a
b
*********************
k
Osaka GUI Design
k
Kyoceramita
[ Menu ]
k
UI R&D DEP.
Account. List:
a
b
k
UI R&D DEP.
*********************
k
Kyoceramita
[ Menu ]
k
Osaka GUI Design
Detail:
C
b
Account Name: 1/7
Osaka GUI Design
[ Edit ]
Management
11-19
11
4After completing changing the account
information, press the OK key again. A
confirmation screen appears.
5Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account
information is changed. Registered. is displayed
and the screen returns to Account. List.
Deleting an account
1Press the U or V key to select the account you
want to delete, and then press [Menu] (the Right
Select key).
2Press the U or V key to select [Delete].
3Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
4Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The account is
deleted. Completed. is displayed and the screen
returns to Account. List.
Managing the Copier/Printer Counts
You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying
and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-20, Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11-27 and
Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-31 for details.
Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.
Overwrite.
Are you sure?
z
k
Osaka GUI DESIGN
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Account. List:
a
b
k
UI R&D DEP.
*********************
k
Kyoceramita
[ Menu ]
k
Osaka GUI Design
Menu:
a
b
1
Detail/Edit
*********************
3
Add Account
2
Delete
Delete.
Are you sure?
z
k
UI R&D DEPT.
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Management
11-20
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting].
5Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [Copy/Print Count].
7Press the OK key. Copy/Print Count appears.
8
Press the U or V key to select [Total] or [Split].
9
Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Default Setting menu.
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the
Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-19.
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
*********************
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
2
Job Account.Set.
Job Account.Set:
a
b
*********************
2
Account Report
3
Total Accounting
[ Exit ]
1
Job Accounting
Default Setting:
a
b
1
Apply Limit
*********************
3
Counter Limit
[ Exit ]
2
Copy/Print Count
Copy/Print Count:
a
b
1
Total
*********************
2
*Split
Management
11-21
11
Restriction Items
[Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count
[Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count
Item Detail
Copier print limit
(total) A limit can be set for the total number of full color
copies, monochrome copies, and black & white
copies.
Copier print limit
(full color) A limit can be set for the number of full color copies.
Printer print limit
(total) A limit can be set for the total number of pages
printed in color and black & white.
Printer print limit
(color) A limit can be set for the number of pages printed in
color.
Scan Restriction
(Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes
copying).
Fax TX
Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (Only on
products with the fax function installed)
Item Detail
Print limit (total) A limit can be set for the total number of printer and
copier pages printed.
Print limit (full
color) A limit can be set for the number of pages printed in
full color.
Scan Restriction
(Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes
copying).
Fax TX
Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. (Only on
products with the fax function installed)
Management
11-22
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows:
Use the procedure below to select a restriction method.
1Follow steps 1 to 7 of Adding an Account on page
11-16.
2In Account. List, press the U or V key to select the
account to which you want to set restriction of use,
and then press the OK key.
3Press the Y or Z key to select the item to be
restricted and then press [Edit] (the Right Select
key).
When selecting [Split] in Copy/Print Count, screen
changes as shown in the left.
4Press the U or V key to select the desired
restriction method and then press the OK key.
Item Description
Off No restriction given
Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments
up to 9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage Restriction is applied.
Account. List:
a
b
k
UI R&D DEP.
*********************
k
Kyoceramita
[ Menu ]
k
Osaka GUI Design
Detail:
C
b
Print Restrict.: 4/6
Off
[ Edit ]
Detail:
C
b
Print Restrict.: 4/7
Copier
Off
[ Edit ]
Print Restrict.:
a
b
*********************
2
Counter Limit
3
Reject Usage
[ Exit ]
1
*Off
Management
11-23
11
If you select [Counter Limit], enter the upper limit
number of pages in the next screen, and then
press the OK key.
5Repeat step 3 to 4 to set items as necessary.
6Press the OK key again. A confirmation screen
appears.
7Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The restriction of
use is changed. Registered. is displayed and the
screen returns to Account. List.
Applying Limit of Restriction
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below
describes the action taken.
Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit.
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Job Account. Set.].
Limit Pages:
D
b
(1 - 9999999)
**123456*
pages
Overwrite.
Are you sure?
z
k
Osaka GUI DESIGN
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Item Description
Immediately *
* The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the
subsequent job will be rejected.
Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message.
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
*********************
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
2
Job Account.Set.
Management
11-24
3Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting].
5Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [Apply Limit].
7Press the OK key. Apply Limit appears.
8
Press the U or V key to select [Immediately],
[Subsequently] or [Alert Only].
9
Press the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Default Setting menu.
Job Account.Set.:
a
b
4
Each Job Account
5
Account. List
*********************
[ Exit ]
6
Default Setting
Default Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Copy/Print Count
3
Counter Limit
[ Exit ]
1
Apply Limit
Apply Limit:
a
b
1
Immediately
*********************
3
Alert Only
[ Exit ]
2
*Subsequently
Management
11-25
11
Default Counter Limit
When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used.
You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/
Printer Counts on page 11-19.
Available Settings
[Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count
[Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count
Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits.
Item Detail
Copier print limit
(total) A default value can be set for the total color copy
and black & white copy limit.
Copier print limit
(full color) A default value can be set for the full color copy
limit.
Printer print limit
(total) A default value can be set for the total color and
black & white printed page limit.
Printer print limit
(color) A default value can be set for the color printed page
limit.
Scan Restriction
(Other) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets
used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX
Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets
used for sending faxes. (Only on products with the
fax function installed)
Item Detail
Print limit (total) A default value can be set for the full color printed
page limit.
Print limit (full
color) Sets the default restriction on the total number of
sheets used for copying and printing.
Scan Restriction
(Other) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets
used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX
Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets
used for sending faxes. (Only on products with the
fax function installed)
Management
11-26
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Default Setting].
5Press the OK key. The Default Setting menu
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select [Counter Limit].
7Press the OK key. Counter Limit appears.
8Press the U or V key to select the item for which
you want to set the default restriction on the
number of sheets, and then press the OK key.
9Use the numeric keys to enter the default
restriction on the number of sheets, and then press
the OK key.
Completed. is displayed and the screen returns to
Counter Limit.
10 Repeat steps 10 to 11 set other default restrictions
on the number of sheets.
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
*********************
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
2
Job Account.Set.
Job Account.Set.:
a
b
1
Each Job Account
2
Account. List
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
Default Setting
Default Setting:
a
b
*********************
2
Copy/Print Count
3
Counter Limit
[ Exit ]
1
Apply Limit
Counter Limit:
a
b
*********************
2
Print Restrict.
3
ScanRest.(Other)
1
Copy Restriction
Copy(Total):
D
b
(1 - 9999999)
**123456*
Management
11-27
11
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job
Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period
of time.
Types of the counts are as follows.
Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same
time.
Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter.
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Total Accounting].
Item Detail
Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed,
and the total number of pages used. You can also
use [Duplex Pages] and [Combine Pages] to check
the number of pages used.
Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying,
faxing* and other functions, as well as the total
number of pages scanned.
FAX TX Pages* Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX TX Time*
* Only on products with the fax function installed
Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
*********************
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
2
Job Account.Set.
Job Account.Set:
a
b
*********************
2
Account. Report
3
Total Accounting
[ Exit ]
1
Job Accounting
Management
11-28
5Press the OK key. The Total Accounting menu
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the function of
which you want to check counts, and then press
the OK key.
If you select [Printed Pages] or [Scanned Pages],
press the Y or Z key to switch the counted items.
7After confirming the content, press the OK key.
The screen returns to the Total Accounting menu.
8To reset the counter, press the U or V key to
select [Counter Reset].
9Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
10 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is
reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen
returns to the Total Accounting menu.
Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account.
Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter.
Total Accounting:
a
b
*********************
2
Scanned Pages
3
FAX TX Pages
[ Exit ]
1
Printed Pages
Copy/Print Pages:
C
b
Copy(B & W): 1/5
1234567
Total Accounting:
a
b
1
Printed Pages
2
Scanned Pages
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
Counter Reset
Reset counter.
Are you sure?
z
Total JobAccounting
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Management
11-29
11
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Each Job
Account].
5Press the OK key. The Each Job Accounting menu
appears.
6Press the U or V key to select the account of
which you want to check counts.
7Press the OK key. A menu for the account
appears.
8Press the U or V key to select the function of
which you want to check counts, and then press
the OK key.
If you select [Printed Pages], select the item for
which you want to check printed page counts, and
then press the OK key. Press the Y or Z key to
switch the counted items.
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
*********************
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
2
Job Account.Set.
Job Account.Set.:
a
b
*********************
5
Account List
6
Default Setting
[ Exit ]
4
Each Job Account
Each Job Account:
a
b
*********************
k
Kyoceramita
k
UI R&D DEPT.
k
Osaka GUI DESIGN
Osaka GUI DESIGN:
a
b
*********************
2
Scanned Pages
3
Counter Reset
[ Exit ]
1
Printed Pages
Management
11-30
If you select [Scanned Pages], press the Y or Z
key to switch the counted items.
If the number of output sheets is restricted by an
account management function, the upper limit on
the number of output sheets is also displayed.
9After confirming the content, press the OK key.
The screen returns to the menu for the account.
10 To reset the counter, press the U or V key to
select [Counter Reset].
11 Press the OK key. A confirmation screen appears.
12 Press [Yes] (the Left Select key). The counter is
reset. Completed. is displayed and the screen
returns to the menu for the account.
Copy/Print Pages:
C
b
Copy(B & W): 1/5
1234567
Limit:1234567
Osaka GUI DESIGN:
a
b
1
Printed Pages
2
Scanned Pages
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
Counter Reset
Reset counter.
Are you sure?
z
k
Osaka GUI DESIGN
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Management
11-31
11
Printing an Accounting Report
Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.
Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.
1See the procedure for displaying user control on
page 11-2, and display the User/Job Account.
2In the User/Job Account menu, press the U or V
key to select [Job Account. Set.].
3Press the OK key. The Job Account. Set. menu
appears.
4Press the U or V key to select [Account. Report]
and then press the OK key.
FS-C2126MFP
User/Job Account:
a
b
1
User Login Set.
*********************
3
Unknown ID Job
[ Exit ]
2
Job Account.Set.
Job Account.Set:
a
b
*********************
2
Account. Report
3
Total Accounting
[ Exit ]
1
Job Accounting
Management
11-32
5In the confirmation screen, press [Yes] (the Left
Select key). A job accounting report is printed.
Print.
Are you sure?
z
Total JobAccounting
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Management
11-33
11
Checking the Counter
You can check the number of pages printed and scanned.
The number is counted by the following items:
1Press the system menu / counter key, press U or
V key to select [Counter] from the system menu /
counter menu, and press the OK key.
2If user control is disabled, the user authentication
screen appears. Enter the Login User Name and
Login Password, and press [Login]. In this case,
log in with administrator authority. For the default
Login User Name and Login Password, see
Adding a User on page 11-6.
3Press the U or V key to select [Printed Pages] or
[Scanned Pages], and then press the OK key.
NOTE: Refer to Character Entry Method on
Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
If you select [Printed Pages], select [by Function]
or [by Paper Size] in the next screen, and then
press the OK key.
Item Description
Printed
Pages By Function You can check the number of pages copied,
faxed*, and printed, and the total number of
pages used.
* FAX functions available only on products with the fax function
installed.
By Paper
Size You can check the number of pages printed
for each paper size.
Scanned Pages You can check the number of pages copied,
faxed*, and otherwise scanned, and the
total number of pages used.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
*********************
3
System
[ Exit ]
2
Counter
Login User Name
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
Counter:
a
b
*********************
2
Scanned Pages
[ Exit ]
1
Printed Pages
Printed Pages:
a
b
*********************
2
by Paper Size
[ Exit ]
1
by Function
Management
11-34
4Press the Y or Z key to check the count.
5After completing checking the count, press the OK
key. The screen returns to the menu for the
account.
Printed Pages:
C
b
Copy(B & W): 1/5
1234567
Appendix-1
Appendix
• Optional Equipment......................................... Appendix-2
• Character Entry Method .................................. Appendix-7
• Paper............................................................. Appendix-11
• Color balance adjustment.............................. Appendix-21
• Sharpness adjustment................................... Appendix-22
• Color saturation adjustment...........................Appendix-22
• Specifications................................................. Appendix-23
• Glossary ........................................................ Appendix-28
Appendix-2
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
Paper Feeder
Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s double cassettes can be installed in the machine. Paper
capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1.
NOTE: To allow paper to be removed when a paper jam occurs, there is a cover (rear cover) on the rear side
of the paper feeder.
CAUTION: When using the paper feeder, be sure to replace the cover.
Expansion Memory
To expand the printer memory for more complex print jobs and faster print speed, you can plug in optional memory
module (dual in line memory module) in the memory slot provided on the main controller board. You can select
additional memory module from 128, 256, 512 or 1024 MB. The maximum memory size is 1792 MB.
NOTE: The expansion memory should only be installed by your service technician. We shall not be liable for any
damages caused by improper installation of expansion memory.
Expansion Memory
Paper Feeder
Cover
Appendix-3
Precautions for Handling the Memory Module
To protect electronic parts, discharge static
electricity from your body by touching a water pipe
(faucet) or other large metal object before handling
the memory module. Or, wear an antistatic wrist
strap, if possible, when you install the memory
module.
Installing the Memory Module
1Turn off the machine and disconnect the power
cord and interface cable.
2Remove the right cover with a piece of metal
similar to coin.
3Open the inside cover.
4Remove the memory module from its package.
Correct Incorrect
Appendix-4
5With the memory connection terminal pointing
toward the socket, align the cut-out part with the
socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.
CAUTION: Before inserting a memory module in the
machine, make sure that the machine is switched off.
6Carefully press the inserted memory down and into
the machine.
7Reinstall the right cover.
Removing the Memory Module
To remove a memory module, remove the right cover
and the memory slot cover from the machine. Then,
carefully push out the two socket clamps. Ease the
memory module out of the socket to remove.
Verifying the expanded memory
To verify that the memory module is working properly,
test it by printing a status page.
Optional Function
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Overview of the Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis.
• UG-33 (ThinPrint) (This application can only be activated in Europe.)
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
NOTE: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ
depending on the application.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Appendix-5
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Op Function].
4Press the OK key. The Op Function menu
appears.
5Press the U or V key to select desired application.
6Press the OK key. The selected application menu
appears.
7Press the U or V key to select [Official] or [Trial].
If you select [Official], the License key entry
screen is displayed. Enter the License key using
the numeric keys and press the OK key.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial]
without entering the License key.
If you select [Trial] and press the OK key, the
confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes] (the
Right Select key).
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Op Function:
a
b
*********************
2
UG-33
T
[ Menu ]
1
ID-Card
g
Licence On:
a
b
*********************
2
Trial
1
*Official
Test the optional
function for a
limited time.
Are you sure?
[ Yes ] [ No ]
Appendix-6
8Licensed. is displayed and the screen returns to
the Op Function menu.
CAUTION: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Checking Application Details
Use the procedure below to check the details of an application.
1In the Sys. Menu/Count. menu, press the U or V
key to select [System], and press the OK key.
When you are performing user management and
have not logged in, a login screen will appear.
Then, enter the Login User Name and Login
Password to log in, and press [Login] (the Right
Select key).
2The System menu appears.
3Press the U or V key to select [Op Function].
4Press the OK key. The Op Function menu
appears.
5Press [Menu] (the Left Select key).
6Press the U or V key to select [Detail]. The detail
setting screen appears.
You can now view detailed information on the
selected application.
Sys. Menu/Count.:
a
b
1
Report
2
Counter
*********************
[ Exit ]
3
System
Login User Name:
L
b
*******************
Login Password:
[ Login ]
System:
a
b
*********************
2
I/F Block Set.
3
Security Level
[ Exit ]
1
Network Setting
Op Function:
a
b
*********************
2
UG-33
T
[ Menu ]
1
ID-Card
g
Menu:
a
b
*********************
2
Detail
1
Licence On
Appendix-7
Character Entry Method
In character entry screens, use the procedure below to enter characters.
Keys Used
Use the following keys to enter characters.
1. OK Key Press this key to finalize the entered character(s).
2. Clear Key Press this key to delete the character at the cursor position. If the cursor is at the end of
the line, the character to the left of it is deleted.
3. Back Key Press this key to return to the screen from which you invoked the character entry screen.
4. Cursor Keys Use these to select the entry position, or select a character from the character list.
5. Numeric Keys Use these keys to select the character you want to enter.
6. Reset Key Press this key to cancel the character entry procedure and return to the standby screen.
7. Right Select Key Press this key to select the type of characters you want to enter. (When [Text] is
displayed)
12
347
6
5
Appendix-8
Selecting Type of Characters
To enter characters, the following three types are available:
ABC To enter alphabets.
123 To enter numerals.
Symbols To enter symbols.
In a character entry screen, press [Text] (the Right
Select key) to select the type of characters you
want to enter.
Each time you press [Text] (the Right Select key),
the character type switches as follows: ABC, 123,
Symbol, ABC ...
NOTE: By pressing on the numeric keys while
entering characters, you can directly display the
Symbols screen.
File name input:
OsakaSD3
*
123
[ Text ]
Current character type
ABC
[ Text ]
123
[ Text ]
Symbols:
a
b
[ Text ]
Appendix-9
Entering Characters
After selecting a character type, use the procedure below to enter characters.
Entering Alphabets and Numerals
Referring to the table below, press the key corresponding to the character you want to enter until it is displayed.
Key Entry mode Available characters
Alphabetic/Symbol . @ - _ / : ¯ 1
Numeric 1
Alphabetic/Symbol a b c A B C 2
Numeric 2
Alphabetic/Symbol d e f D E F 3
Numeric 3
Alphabetic/Symbol g h i G H I 4
Numeric 4
Alphabetic/Symbol j k l J K L 5
Numeric 5
Alphabetic/Symbol m n o M N O 6
Numeric 6
Alphabetic/Symbol p q r s P Q R S 7
Numeric 7
Alphabetic/Symbol t u v T U V 8
Numeric 8
Alphabetic/Symbol w x y z W X Y Z 9
Numeric 9
Alphabetic/Symbol . , - _ ’ ! ? (space) 0
Numeric 0
Alphabetic/Symbol Switch between upper-/lowercase
Numeric * or . (decimal point)*
* '*' is entered when [123] is selected in the character type selection,
or '.' is entered when only numerals are entered and no character
type is selected.
Alphabetic/Symbol
Numeric #
Appendix-10
Characters associated with different keys can be entered consecutively. To enter a character associated with
the same key after another, use cursor keys to move the cursor to the next entry position before entering it.
If you use cursor keys to move the cursor to an entry position apart from the end of the line and enter a character
there, spaces are automatically entered in between.
Entering Symbols
Press [Text] (the Right Select key) or # on the
numeric keys to display the Symbols screen. Use
cursor keys to select the symbol you want to enter
and then press the OK key.
Entry When [Select Character] Is Selected in Login Operation Settings
In the login screen that appears when user management is enabled, the character entry method may vary
depending on the settings. (Refer to Login Operation on page 8-58.)
If a character palette appears on the screen, use
cursor keys to select the desired character from the
displayed characters, and then press the OK key to
enter it.
NOTE: Numerals can be entered directly by pressing
numeric keys.
Symbols:
a
b
[ Text ]
Login User Name:
a
b
Kyocer
*
*
abcdefghijklmnopqrst
uvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
[ Next ]
Appendix-11
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
Cassette
Optional paper feeder
Optional paper feeder (Multi Purpose)
Multi Purpose tray (MP tray)
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Plain (60g/m2 to 163g/m2)
Recycled (60g/m2 to 163g/m2)A4, B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter, Oficio
II, Statement, Executive, A6, B6
Envelope C5, 16K, Custom
250 (80g/m2)
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Plain (60g/m2 to 163g/m2)
Recycled (60g/m2 to 163g/m2)
Color (Colour) (60g/m2 to 163g/m2)
A4, B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter,
Statement, Oficio II, Executive, ISO
B5, Envelope C5, 16K, Custom
500 (80g/m2)
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Plain (60g/m2 to 220g/m2)
Recycled (60g/m2 to 220g/m2)
Color (Colour) (60g/m2 to 220g/m2)
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,
Oficio II, A4, A5, B5, Folio, 16k 500 (80g/m2)
Envelopes ISO B5, Envelope #6, Envelope C5,
Youkei 2, Envelope #10, Envelope DL,
Envelope #9, Envelope Monarch,
Youkei 4
Loading height: 40mm
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Plain, Preprinted, Labels, Bond,
Recycled, Rough, Vellum,
Letterhead, Color (Colour),
Prepunched, Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,
Oficio II, A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio,
16k
Other sizes:
Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm
Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to
356 mm
50 (80g/m2)
Appendix-12
Thick paper A4, JIS B5, A5, Folio, Legal, Letter,
Oficio II, Statement, Executive, A6,
B6, ISO B5, 16K
Other sizes:
Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm
Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to
356 mm
1
Postcards
Oufuku Hagaki (return postcard) Postcards (100 × 148 mm)
Return postcard (148 × 200 mm) 15
Envelopes ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,
Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2
Other sizes:
Portrait-2.76 to 8.50" or 70 to 216 mm
Landscape-5.83 to 14.02" or 148 to
356 mm
5
Transparency (OHP film) Letter, A4 1
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Appendix-13
Basic Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers
such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given
in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality
of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent
sections for further details.
NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic
Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend
purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that
gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our
specifications.
Criteria Specifications
Weight Cassettes: 60 to 163 g/m2
Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2
Thickness 0.086 to 0.110 mm
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Moisture content 9%
Grain direction Long grain (paper supply direction)
Pulp content 80% or more
Appendix-14
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface
or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor
copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and
even surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing
unit.
Ingredient
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or
carbon. These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper
content consists of cotton or other fibers.
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner
angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.
Multi Purpose Tray Cassette or Multi
Purpose Tray
B6 (128 × 182 mm) Letter
ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm) Legal
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2") Statement
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8") Executive
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2") Oficio II
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 × 7 1/2") A4 (297 × 210 mm)
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) A5 (210 × 148 mm)
Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm) A6 (105 × 148 mm)
Hagaki (100 × 148mm) B5 (257 × 182 mm)
Oufuku Hagaki (148 × 200 mm) Folio (210 × 330 mm)
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm) 16K (273 × 197 mm)
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)
Size Entry (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)
Appendix-15
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery,
several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square
meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut
to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be
supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight
(i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or
other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.
The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 163 g/m2 for the cassettes and between 60 and 220 g/m2
for the multi purpose tray.
Thickness
Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper
jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick.
The proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the
paper is supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes
paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to
lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between
4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to
be used for a while.
• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the
floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete
floors.
• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Appendix-16
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit,
it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the
paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper
that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are
rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially
careful when you cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should
have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms
to the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to
test.
• Glossy paper
• Watermarked paper
• Paper with an uneven surface
• Perforated paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
The following paper and media can be used.
• Transparency (OHP film)
• Rough
• Vellum
• Labels
•Recycled
•Preprinted
•Bond
• Cardstock
• Color (Colour)
• Prepunched
• Letterhead
• Envelope
•Thick
• Coated
• High Quality
• Custom 1 to 8
When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as
laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label
paper.
Appendix-17
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will
vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is
more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing
a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are
given below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by
moisture or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.
Transparency (OHP film)
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following
conditions.
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side
facing the machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
Cardstock
Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan
them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is
curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto
curled Hagaki may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki (available at post offices).
Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by
a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such
rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and
rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Criteria Specifications
Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material Polyester
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Burrs
Burrs
Appendix-18
Envelopes
Envelopes should always be fed from the MP tray or paper feeder (multi purpose), with the print-side up. If you
use envelopes quite often, we recommend to use the paper feeder (multi purpose).
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases.
Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before
purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until
you are ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive
is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive
comes off in the machine.
Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for
winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in
the top tray at once.
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have
rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki
by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper
with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray
with the leading edge raised a few millimeters.
Label
Labels must be fed from the MP tray or paper feeder (multi purpose).
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the
machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or
rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the
illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that
are easily affected by the force applied in the machine.
The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is
used. This composition of labels may cause more
problems.
Top sheet
Adhesive layer
Carrier sheet
Appendix-19
The label surface must be covered completely with the
top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of
labels, resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from
the carrier sheet before completing output.
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 13 of the Appendix. In addition, the
pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
NOTE: If you use colored paper quite often, we recommend to use paper feeder (multi purpose).
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 11 of the Appendix. The colored ink must
be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a
treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 13 of the Appendix; however, its
whiteness may be considered separately.
NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality.
Item Specifications
Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight
(overall paper weight) 104 to 151 g/m²
Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)
Top sheet
Not allowedAllowed
Carrier sheet
Appendix-20
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing
quality than plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.
The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by
making the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one
side. The coated side appears slightly glossy.
IMPORTANT: When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as
moisture may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the printer.
Paper Type Indicators (paper feeder (multi purpose))
If you are going to load non-standard paper in the paper feeder
(multi purpose), fold the provided paper type indicator sheet into
thirds so that the appropriate paper type symbol faces out and is at
the top, and insert it into the cassette's display folder.
:Envelopes
:Thick paper
:Labels
:Coated paper
The blank sheet can be used to write in any name or symbol.
When writing in a name or symbol on the bottom part of the sheet,
invert it with respect to the top part.
Appendix-21
Color balance adjustment
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments. (Refer to the Operation
Guide for configuration details)
Original
More Yellow More Cyan
More Black
Less Yellow
Less Magenta
Less Cyan
Less Black
More Magenta
Appendix-22
Sharpness adjustment
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. (Refer to the Operation Guide for configuration details)
Color saturation adjustment
The color saturation of the image can be adjusted. Color can be emphasized, or color can be made paler and
closer to a monotone.
Original More SharpLess Sharp
Setting a low color
saturation
Original
Setting a high color
saturation
Appendix-23
Specifications
NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Machine
Item Description
FS-C2026MFP FS-C2126MFP
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Folio/Legal)
Original Feed System Fixed
Paper
Weight Front
Cassette 60 to 163 g/m2 (Duplex: 60 to 163 g/m2)
Multi Purpose
Tray 60 to 220 g/m2, 230 µm (Cardstock)
Paper Type Front
Cassette Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched,
Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as
Simplex)
Multi Purpose
Tray Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Front
Cassette Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/A4 (Duplex: 8 1/2 × 14"/A4)
Minimum: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A6 (Duplex: 7 1/4 × 10 1/2"/A5)
Multi Purpose
Tray Maximum: 8 1/2 × 14"/A4
Minimum: 3 5/8 × 6 1/2"/B6
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Fixed magnifications:
400%, 200%, 141%, 129%, 115%, 90%, 86%, 78%, 70%, 64%, 50%, 25%
Printing
Speed Simplex A4R: 26 sheets/min LetterR: 28 sheets/min
Legal: 23 sheets/min B5R: 28 sheets/min
A5R/A6R: 28 sheets/min
Duplex A4R: 13 sheets/min LetterR: 14 sheets/min
Legal: 12 sheets/min
First Print
Time
(A4, feed
from
Cassette)
Black & White When using the document processor: 11 seconds or less
When the document processor is not used: 10 seconds or less
Color When using the document processor: 13 seconds or less
When the document processor is not used: 12 seconds or less
Appendix-24
Warm-up
Time
(22°C/
71.6°F,60%)
Power on 25 seconds
Sleep 20 seconds
Paper
Capacity Front
Cassette 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multi Purpose
Tray 50 sheets (80 g/m2, plain paper, A4/Letter or less)
Output Tray Capacity 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets (can be set in one sheet increments)
Image Write System Semiconductor laser
Main Memory Standard: 768MB Maximum: 1792MB
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
USB Host: 2
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)
Option KUIO/W slot: 1, KUIO-G2: 1
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi
Operating
Environment Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity 15 to 80 %
Altitude 8,200 feet/2,500 m or less
Brightness 1,500 lux or less
Dimension (W × D × H) 20 15/64 × 21 42/64 × 22 53/64"
514 × 550 × 580 mm 20 15/64 × 21 42/64 × 22 53/64"
514 × 550 × 580 mm
Weight (with toner container) 73.85 lb/33.5 kg 73.85 lb/33.5 kg
Space Required (W × D) 20 15/64 × 40 5/32"
514 × 1020 mm (with Multi Purpose Tray expanded)
Power Requirement 120V Specification Model: 120V AC, 60Hz more than 8.9A
230V Specification Model: 220 - 240V AC, 50/60Hz more than 4.7A
Options Paper feeder (up to 2 units)
Item Description
FS-C2026MFP FS-C2126MFP
Appendix-25
Printer
Item Description
Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.
First Print Time
(A4, feed from Cassette) Black & White: 9.0 seconds or less
Color: 10.5 seconds or less
Resolution 600 dpi
Operating System Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows XP Professional, Windows Server
2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Vista x86 Edition,
Windows Vista x64 Edition, Windows 7 x86 Edition, Windows 7 x64
Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition, Apple
Macintosh OS 10.x
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
USB Host: 2
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Appendix-26
Scanner
*1 Available Operating System : Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows
Server 2008, Windows 7
*2 Available Operating System : Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7
Item Description
Operating System Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4), Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008
System requirements IBM PC/AT compatible
CPU: Celeron 600Mhz or higher
RAM: 128MB or more
HDD free space: 20MB or more
Interface: Ethernet
Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi
File Format JPEG, TIFF, PDF, XPS
Scanning Speed 1-sided: B/W 25 Images/min
Color 13 Images/min
2-sided: B/W 13 Images/min
Color 7 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)
USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network Protocol TCP/IP
Transmission
System PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB
FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL
E-mail transmission SMTP Scan to E-mail
TWAIN scan*1
WIA scan*2
Appendix-27
Document Processor
Environmental Specifications
NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
Item Description
Original Feed
Method Automatic feed
Supported
Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: Legal/A4
Minimum: Statement/A5
Paper Weight 50 to 120 g/m2 (Duplex: 50 to 110 g/m2)
Loading Capacity 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Dimensions
(W) × (D) × (H)
19 19/64 × 21 × 4 3/32"
490 × 338 × 104 mm
Weight 3 kg or less
Item Description
FS-C2026MFP FS-C2126MFP
Time to Sleep mode (default setting) 1 minutes
Recovery time from Sleep mode 20 seconds or less
Duplexing Standard
Paper supply capability 100% recycled paper may be used.
Appendix-28
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically
challenged or visually impaired.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer
sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk
network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the
auto form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However,
no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
This is a protocol that automatically assigns IP addresses on a TCP/IP network. On a network without a DHCP
server, this can assign IP addresses so that there is no duplication with other devices. IP addresses are
assigned from the range 169.254.0.0 to 169.254.255.255, which is reserved for Auto-IP.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing
Auto Sleep Mode
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers,
devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows
devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set.
Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must
check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject
only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour
is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows
XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP
address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and
gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large
Appendix-29
number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being
assigned.
dpi (dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates
operation of PCL6, KC-GL, KPDL, and KPDL (automatic).
FTP(File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and
SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying
from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed
in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits;
and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the
network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each
number should be between 0 and 255.
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs
to be sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view
websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the
HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on
smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of
Appendix-30
routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and
Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
NetWare
Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part
1: Use of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and
is a specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO
19005-2 (PDF/A-2), is currently being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-
functional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985,
followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level
3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in
implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine
is contained in the CD-ROM enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to
the machine.
RAM Disk
Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer
memory as a RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be
selected from the list or entered at each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail
servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper
source settings.
Appendix-31
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask
represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix
indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the
network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address
"133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix
(network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the
subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP
setting to Off.
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each
other over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet
protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under
IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to
prioritize data transmission.
TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the
computers. The TWAIN compatible devices enable to process image data on any relevant application software.
TWAIN is adopted on a large number of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is
equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral
devices.This function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions
and improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any
application.
Appendix-32
Index
Index-1
Index
Numerics
1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-8
A
Accessibility Appendix-28
Adjusting Density 5-16
Auto 3-9
Manual 3-9
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-101
Copy Density Adjustment 8-101
Correcting Fine Black Lines 8-111
Send/Box Density 8-102, 8-103, 8-104
AppleTalk Appendix-28
Setup 8-153
Auto Paper Selection Appendix-28
Auto Sleep 2-9, Appendix-28
B
Bonjour Appendix-28
Bundled Items 2-2
Buzzer 8-6
C
Cassette
Loading Paper 2-27
Paper Size and Media Type 8-13
CD-ROM 2-2
Changing Language 2-10, 8-3
Cleaning
Separator 9-4, 9-6
Slit Glass 9-3
Color
Color / Grayscale / Black and White
Selection 5-19
Color mode
Color Selection (Copy) 8-33
Combine Mode
2-in-1 Mode 4-11
4-in-1 Mode 4-12
Page Boundary Lines 4-12
COMMAND CENTER 2-23
Connecting
LAN Cable 2-5
Power Cable 2-10
USB Cable 2-10
Connection Method 2-3
Continuous Scan
Copy 4-14
Send 5-20
Conventions in This Guide xxxix
Copy
Adjusting Density 3-9
Collate Copying 3-20
Duplex Copying 3-16
Offset Copying 3-20
Originals 4-2
Selecting Image Quality 3-11
Setup 8-62
Zoom Copying 3-13
Copy Settings 8-62
Auto Paper Selection 8-64, 8-65
Paper Selection 8-63
Quick Setup Registration 8-68
Copying Functions 4-1
Counting the Number of Pages
Printed 11-27
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
Each Job 11-28
Printing a Report 11-31
Total Job 11-27
D
Date/Timer 8-117
Auto Panel Reset 8-128
Date Format 8-119
Date/Time 8-117
Time Zone 8-120
Index
Index-2
Default 8-29
Collate/Offset 8-42
Color Selection (Copy) 8-33
Continuous Scan 8-30
Density 8-37
EcoPrint 8-43
E-mail Subject/Body 8-40
File Format 8-36
File Name 8-39
Original Image 8-31
Original Orientation 8-29
Scan Resolution 8-32
TIFF Print 8-44
XPS FitTo Page 8-45, 8-46
Zoom 8-38
Default Gateway Appendix-28
Default Screen 8-5
Density Adjustment
Copy 3-9
Send 5-16
Destination 8-133
Adding 8-133
Adding a Group 8-139
Choosing by One-Touch Key 3-46
Choosing from the Address Book 3-44
Editing 8-143
One-touch Key 8-145
Search 3-45
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) 3-
47
Device 7-19
Checking Status 7-19
Configuring 7-20
DHCP Appendix-28
Document Box 6-1
Quick Setup Registration 8-74
Document Processor Appendix-27
How to Load Originals 2-45
Loading Originals 2-44
Not Supported Originals 2-44
Part Names 2-44
Supported Originals 2-44
dpi Appendix-29
Duplex 3-16, 8-84
E
EcoPrint Mode Appendix-29
Copy 4-10
Print 8-82
E-mail
Send as E-mail 3-26
Emulation Appendix-29
Selection 8-79
Energy Star Program xxxvii
Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-22
Entry
Body 5-22
File Name 4-17, 5-21
Subject 5-22
Environment xxi
Error Handling 8-27
Error Messages 10-7
Expansion Memory Appendix-2
F
FileFormat 5-12
File Name 4-17
FTP Appendix-29
FTP Encrypted TX 5-30, 5-31
G
GPL xxxiv
Grayscale 5-19, Appendix-29
I
Image Quality
Copy 3-7
Send 5-15
Included Guides 2
Interface Block 8-168
IP Address Appendix-29
IPP Appendix-29
J
Job
Index
Index-3
Available Status 7-2
Canceling 3-50, 7-18
Checking History 7-8
Checking Status 7-2
Pause and Resumption 7-18
Sending the Job Log History 7-13
Job Accounting 11-13
Managing the Copier/Printer Counts 11-
19
Restricting the Use of the Machine 11-
20
Job Finish Notice 5-28
Copy 4-15
Send 5-28
K
KPDL Appendix-29
L
Label Appendix-18
LAN Cable
Connecting 2-5
Legal Information xxxii
Login 3-2, 11-5
Logout 3-2, 11-5
Low Power Mode 2-9
M
Management 11-1
Job Accounting 11-13
User Login Administration 11-2
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
xxxvi
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray Appendix-29
Paper Size and Media 2-40, 8-15
Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types
of Destinations ) 3-47
N
NetBEUI Appendix-29
NetWare 8-151, Appendix-30
Setup 8-151
Network
Setup 2-14
Network Cable 2-4
Connecting 2-5
Network Interface 2-4
Network Security 8-160
Network Setup
AppleTalk 8-153
FTP (Reception) 8-157
HTTP 8-157
HTTPS 8-157
IPP over SSL 8-158
LAN Interface 8-149
LDAP 8-157
LPD 8-157
NetBEUI 8-157
NetWare 8-151
POP3 (E-mail RX) 8-157
Raw Port 8-157
SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-157
SNMP 8-157
TCP/IP (IPv4) 8-150
TCP/IP (IPv6) 8-150, 8-154, 8-155
O
Open SSLeay xxxiv
Operation Panel 1-2
Option
Expansion Memory Appendix-2
Overview Appendix-2
Paper Feeder Appendix-2
Optional Functions 8-174
Original
Loading in the Document
Processor 2-44
Placing on the Platen 2-43
Original Orientation
Copy 4-8
Document Processor 4-8
Send 5-10
Original Size Indicator Plates 2-43
Original Size Selection
Send 5-2
Original SSLeay License xxxv
Originals
Index
Index-4
Copy 4-2
Custom 8-8
Setup 8-8
Size Selection 4-2, 5-2
P
Paper
Appropriate Paper Appendix-14
Auto Selection 8-22
Before Loading 2-26
Cassette 8-13
Custom 8-11
Default Paper Source 8-21
Loading Envelopes 2-31
Loading in the Cassettes 2-27
Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2-29
Multi Purpose Tray 8-15
Setup 8-8
Size and Media 2-35, Appendix-11
Special Paper 8-23, Appendix-16
Specifications Appendix-13
Weight 8-17
Paper Feeder Appendix-2
Paper Jam 10-16
Document Processor 10-20
Paper Selection 4-4
Cassette 4-4
Multi Purpose Tray 4-5
Part Names 1-1
Platen
Placing Originals 2-43
POP3 Appendix-30
PostScript Appendix-30
Power Cable
Connecting 2-10
Power Off 2-7
Power On 2-7
PPM Appendix-30
Preparation 2-1
Preparing Cables 2-4
Printer
Setup 8-79
Printer Driver Appendix-30
Printer Settings 8-79
Copies 8-85
CR Action 8-91
Duplex 8-84
EcoPrint 8-82
Emulation 8-79
Form Feed Timeout 8-89, 8-92
LF Action 8-90
Orientation 8-87
Override A4/Letter 8-83
Printing 3-22
Printing from Applications 3-22
Printing Reports/Sending Notice 8-95
Font List 8-96
Network Status Page 8-97
Service Status Page 8-97
Status Page 8-95
Transmission Result Reports 8-99
Product Library 2-2
Q
Quick Setup Screen
Changing Registration 8-68, 8-70, 8-74
R
Resolution Appendix-24, Appendix-25
Restarting the System 8-148
S
Safety Conventions i
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) xxv
Scan Resolution 5-18
Default settings 8-32
Send
File Format 5-12
Image Quality 5-15
Original Size Selection 5-2
Sending Size Selection 5-4
Setup 8-70
Sending
Send as E-mail 3-26
Send to Folder (FTP) 3-30
Send to Folder (SMB) 3-30
Sending E-mail 2-24
Sending Functions 5-1
Index
Index-5
Sending Settings 8-70
Quick Setup Registration 8-70
Sending Size Selection 5-4
Sending to Different Types of Destinations
(Multi Sending) 3-47
Separator
Cleaning 9-4, 9-6
Setting Date and Time 2-11
Setup
AppleTalk 8-153
Copy 8-62
Date/Timer 8-117
NetWare 8-151
Network 8-149
Printer 8-79
Send 8-70
Sharpness adjustment Appendix-22
Sleep 2-9
Slit Glass
Cleaning 9-3
SMTP Appendix-30
Solving Malfunctions 10-2
Specifications
Document Processor Appendix-27
Environmental Specifications
Appendix-27
Machine Appendix-23
Printer Appendix-25
Scanner Appendix-26
Specifying Destination 3-44
Status / Job Cancel 7-1
Status Page 8-95, Appendix-30
Subnet Mask Appendix-31
Switching the Language 2-10, 8-3
Switching Unit of Measurement 8-26
Symbols i
System Menu 8-1
T
TCP/IP Appendix-31
Trade Names xxxiii
TWAIN Appendix-31
U
Unusable Time 8-130
USB Appendix-31
USB Cable
Connecting 2-10
USB Interface 2-4
USB Memory
Printing Documents 6-2
Removing 6-7, 6-8
Saving Documents 6-5
TIFF Print 6-3
XPS FitTo Page 6-4
User Login Administration 11-2
Adding 11-6
Changing Properties 11-8
Displaying Network User Property 11-11
Enabling/Disabling 11-3
Enabling/Disabling Group
Authentication 11-10
Login 11-5
Logout 11-5
Unknown login user name Job 11-12
W
WIA Appendix-31
WSD Scan 5-26
X
XPS
File formats 5-12, 8-36
Saving documents to Removable USB
Memory 6-5
Z
Zoom Copying
Auto Zoom 3-13
Manual Zoom 3-13
Preset Zoom 3-13
Zoom Mode
Copy 3-13, 5-6
Send 5-6
Index
Index-6
First edition 2010.5
2KWKMEN000

Navigation menu